SPECIFICATIONS. Permit Set RICHMOND CITY HALL: SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS. City of Richmond, Virginia Architect s Project No

Transcription

1 SPECIFICATIONS Permit Set RICHMOND CITY HALL: SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS ARCHITECT RICHMOND, VIRGINIA MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS GLEN ALLEN, VIRGINIA A/E s Project No set No. August 3, 2018

2 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Refer to Project Book under separate cover for additional requirements) SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Summary Substitution Procedures Contract Modification Procedures Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution Construction Waste Management and Disposal Closeout Procedures Operation and Maintenance Data Project Record Documents Demonstration and Training Indoor Air Quality Requirements DIVISION 2- EXISTING CONDITIONS Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 3 CONCRETE (Section Not Used) DIVISION 4 - MASONRY (Section Not Used) DIVISION 5 - METALS Cold Formed Steel Framing DIVISION 6 - WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Joint Sealants TABLE OF CONTENTS

3 DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS Steel Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Door Hardware Automatic Door Operators DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Cold Formed Steel Framing - Non-Structural Gypsum Board Resilient Base and Accessories Tile Carpeting Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Signage DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (Section Not Used) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (Section Not Used) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Section Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Section Not Used) DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION (Section Not Used) DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING (Section Not Used) DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL (Section Not Used) DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (Section Not Used) DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Grounding and Bonding Hangers and Supports for Electrical Raceways and Boxes TABLE OF CONTENTS

4 Sleeves and Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling Electrical Identification ARC Flash Study Lighting Control Panelboards Wiring Devices Fuses Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Enclosed Controllers LED Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Pathways for Technology and Audio/Visual DIVISIONS 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (Section Not Used) DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK (Section Not Used) DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (Section Not Used) DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES (Section Not Used) DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION APPENDIX A (Section Not Used) Asbestos Abatement Specification Asbestos Abatement Report END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS

5 SECTION SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner-furnished products. 9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Richmond City Hall Suite 110 Renovations. 1. Project Location: Richmond City Hall, 900 E. Broad St., Richmond, VA B. Owner:. 1. Anthony Jones C. Architect: Moseley Architects of Richmond, Virginia. D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, and Fire Protection Engineering: Lu + Smith Engineers. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents including but not limited to the following: SUMMARY

6 1. Interior renovations to Richmond City Hall Suite 110. Renovations generally include selective demolition of interior office space; interior gypsum board panel partitions, interior finishes, casework, storefront, wood doors, hollow metal frames, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and fire protection work. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. C. Use of Professional Seals on Bidding, Procurement, and Contract Documents: or the purposes of this paragraph, the term Regulant refers to the individual who signs and seals parts of the Contract Documents (e.g. the Drawings and Specifications). Certain information has been excerpted verbatim from a source or sources (e.g., UL Assemblies, SMACNA details, IBC code text) which was considered or used by Regulant in preparing parts of the Contract Documents, as follows: 1. The excerpted information was neither prepared under the direct control nor personal supervision nor created by the Regulant, as it was prepared by the source and owner of the excerpted information. 2. For purposes of bidding, procuring, and performance of the Work, and in any event of conflicts or ambiguities between the excerpted information in the Contract Documents and the requirements of applicable codes and standards, provide the better quality or greater quantity of Work which, at a minimum, complies with the requirements of the applicable codes and standards. 3. Advise Architect immediately upon becoming aware of requirements of the Work which are not consistent with the requirements of the excerpted information. 4. Attribution is acknowledged for information obtained and included herein verbatim from other source or sources. 5. Regulant has taken into consideration and used certain excerpted information from other sources which are applicable to the Contract Documents, and the Regulant indicates by it's seal that it is assuming responsibility for its services in use and application of the excerpted information to the requirements of Work, but not for the excerpted information itself which was prepared by others. Regulant does not indicate by its seal that it is responsible for use or application of other information in such source or sources which was not included herein. 1.5 PHASED CONSTRUCTION A. The Work shall be conducted in a single phase. The Work shall commence within seven (7) days after the Notice to Proceed and be substantially complete and ready for occupancy by date stated in the (City of Richmond) Project Book. B. Before commencing Work, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel. 1.6 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner and with separate contractors so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. SUMMARY

7 1.7 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Refer to Special Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the work areas indicated on the Drawings. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways parking garage, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate fully with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate full Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits available for egress at all times unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, Owner occupied areas, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 7 days in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. SUMMARY

8 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Comply with the requirements indicated in the (City of Richmond) Project Book. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than 3 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Core drilling or other noisy, disruptive activities shall occur between the hours of 8:00 PM to 11:00 PM Mondays; and 5:00 PM and 11:00 PM Tuesday through Friday and shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner s representative in order to avoid disruption to the adjacent occupied areas, including floors above and below the work area. 2. Notify Owner not less than 3 days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 3. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Owner will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Refer to Special Conditions of the Contract for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY

9 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Contractor shall request and submit a Substitution Request Form After Receipt of Bids for all substitutions to be considered after receipt of bids. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use the Architect s form, which can be obtained from the Architect at the time of the request. a. The form is an electronic Word document requiring the Contractor to fill in data fields. b. A copy of the form is attached to the end of this Section for informational purposes only. Use the electronic Word document only. 2. No substitutions will be considered unless submitted using the referenced Substitution Request Form After Receipt of Bids. 3. All substitutions must be submitted by the Contractor, and shall include the Contractor s certification and signature. a. Substitution requests submitted directly from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, manufacturers, vendors, installer, and suppliers will be rejected. 4. Failure to submit the form, or a fully completed form, shall result in the rejection of the proposed substitution; and shall also include: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. c. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

10 d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 5. If the proposed substitution is found to be acceptable to the Architect, the request will be forwarded to the Owner for their approval. 6. If the Owner approves the substitution, it will then be included in a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. 7. Only substitutions included in Change Orders or Construction Change Directives shall be allowed to be included in the Work 8. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order or Construction Change Directive only. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when all of the following conditions are satisfied. If all of the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed, unless otherwise indicated. C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 15 days after Award of Construction Contract. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when all of the following conditions are satisfied. If all of the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. 1) Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

12 h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

13 SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Substitution Procedures for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, as a Field Order on AIA Document G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 14 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

14 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section Substitution Procedures if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section Allowances for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 or other form acceptable to the Owner. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

16 SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section Allowances for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 01 Section Contract Modification Procedures for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 01 Section Construction Progress Documentation for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the submittal schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each element. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

17 B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents format (specification section numbers and names) to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 3. Total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

18 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: Contractor shall submit application for payment at regularly scheduled pay meetings as established at the Pre-Construction Conference. The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be clarified at the Pre-Construction Conference. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703, or other form approved by the Owner, as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment. b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c. Additional materials stored with this Application. d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

19 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. 5. AIA Document G706A, Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens. 6. AIA Document G707, Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES

20 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section Construction Progress Documentation for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section Execution for procedures for coordinating general installation services. 3. Division 1 Section Closeout Procedures for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Key Personnel Names: Prior to starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

21 individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 ABOVE-CEILING PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings (Optional): Prior to the Above-Ceiling Pre-Construction Conference, prepare drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for the proper and efficient installation of the components, materials, and systems (including, but may not be limited to: above finish ceilings; within chases and shafts; and within mechanical and electrical spaces). 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Ensure components, materials, and systems are indicated where each are fully functional, operational, accessible, and complete. b. Indicate relationships of components, materials, and systems with surrounding construction. c. Indicate installation sequences to avoid conflicts d. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies. Architect will return one copy. a. Coordination Drawings will not be approved by the Architect and will be considered as information only and will be furnished to the Owner for filing. b. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Above-Ceiling Pre-Construction Conference: Schedule and conduct with all affected parties present to review procedures for addressing potential conflicts, review of Coordination Drawings (if furnished) and obtain approval of each affected trade to ensure components, materials, and systems can be installed as intended prior to the Work being performed. 1. Identify Above-Ceiling Pre-Construction Conference on the Construction Schedule as a milestone date. 2. Advise the Architect of potential conflicts identified in the Coordination Drawings (if furnished) and Above-Ceiling Pre-Construction Conference. 3. Do not proceed with construction or installation of the components, materials, and systems until potential conflicts identified have been resolved and affected parties have agreed to a remedy. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

22 C. Remedies to address conflicts not identified in the Coordination Drawings (if furnished), Above-Ceiling Pre-Construction Conference, or otherwise addressed prior to construction or installation of the affected components, materials, and systems; or discovery of a non-workable situation without Coordination Drawings on file with the Owner will not be considered as a basis of delay, time extension, or additional cost to the Contract. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: The Architect will prepare the meeting agenda and distribute it to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: The Architect will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Within 7 days of the meeting the Architect will distribute the meeting minutes to the Owner, the Architect s consultants, and to the Contractor for distribution to his personnel and attending major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. The Architect shall conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Coordination and submittal of color & finish related selections. l. Preparation of Record Documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Construction waste management and recycling. r. Parking availability. s. Office, work, and storage areas. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

23 t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. u. First aid. v. Security. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and Contractor will distribute meeting minutes. 4. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan Development Session: Refer to Division 1 section Indoor Air Quality Requirements. C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Technical specification sections that require pre-installation conferences include but are not limited to the following: a. Section (keying conference) 2. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 3. Contractor will record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: The Architect shall conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: Representatives of the Owner, the Architect and the Contractor shall be represented at each of these meetings. Design consultants, Subcontractors, suppliers, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities may be invited to attend these meetings on an as needed basis to resolve specific issues. All participants at these meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

24 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Indoor Air Quality. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Status of correction of deficient items. 15) Field observations. 16) RFIs. 17) Field Clarification. (FC) 18) Status of proposal requests. 19) Pending changes. (Potential Change Order PCO) 20) Status of Change Orders. (CO) 21) Pending claims and disputes. 22) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Architect will record and Contractor will distribute meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 3. RFIs that would be clearly answered by simply reading the Contract Documents and that are not open to reasonable misinterpretation there from may be deemed "frivolous" by the Architect. The cost in time and materials to respond to frivolous RFI's shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

25 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to conditions of the Contract. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. D. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at intervals as established. Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

26 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

27 SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS (for information only; no action will be taken by the Architect) A. Submittal Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for each submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals. D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. E. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Submittals Schedule, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by Contractor s Construction Schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with Contractor's Construction Schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

28 a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all Work within applicable completion dates. 2. Use one workday as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include reasonable review periods and adequate time for resubmittals in the schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. a. Identify the minimum 30-day time period allowed for color selection activity conducted by Owner and Architect to result in project color schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: As a predecessor to Substantial Completion include activities of reasonable duration for startup and testing of equipment. Schedule should include activities for individual / specific areas, not just one activity for entire project. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion of work activities in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion, and include separate activities for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Schedule Preparation and Constraints: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Others: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner or other contractors necessary for the completion of the Work. 3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Coordinate delivery dates established by Owner with the project schedule. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

29 4. Owner-Furnished Permanent Utilities: Include separate activities indicating when permanent utilities are required. 5. Activities and Work Restrictions: Indicate estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames and show the effect of the following items on the schedule as applicable: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Utility interruptions. d. Uninterruptible services. e. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. f. Use of premises restrictions. g. Provisions for future construction. h. Seasonal variations. i. Environmental control. j. Preparation and processing of submittals. k. Mobilization and demobilization. l. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. 6. Work Stages: Indicate estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Fabrication. b. Installation. c. Tests and inspections, including commissioning. d. Adjusting. e. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Substantial Completion of mechanical installation. b. Substantial Completion of electrical installation. c. Substantial Completion. d. Final Completion. 8. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed (Commencement of the Work), Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Submittal of the Final Construction Schedule by the Contractor certifies that the work will be prosecuted in accordance with the Schedule, subject to any change therein which is implemented in accordance with the Contract Documents G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare reports showing the following: 1. Identification of all activities and relationships that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

30 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. Should the updated Construction Schedule show at any time during Contractor s performance, in the sole opinion of the Owner, that the Contractor is fourteen (14) or more days behind schedule for any Specific Date, or should Contractor be required to undertake actions under the General Conditions hereof, the Contractor shall prepare a Recovery Schedule at no additional cost to the Owner (unless the sole responsibility for the event or occurrence which has caused the schedule slippage is through no fault of the Contractor) explaining and displaying how Contractor intends to reschedule the Work in order to regain compliance with the Construction Schedule during the immediate subsequent pay period. B. Recovery Schedule Requirements: 1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner a one-month maximum duration Recovery Schedule, which demonstrates how the progress of the Work will return to the approved Construction Schedule at the earliest possible time. Prepare the Recovery Schedule to same level of detail as the Construction Schedule. This Recovery Schedule shall be prepared in coordination with other separate contractors on the Project. 2. Contractor shall advise the Owner of the effectiveness of the Recovery Schedule during the schedule recovery time period. At the conclusion of the one month schedule recovery period, the Owner will direct the Contractor as follows: a. If Owner determines the Contractor is still behind schedule, Owner will direct the Contractor to prepare a Schedule Revision and comply with all of the requirements of a Schedule Revision as stated herein and the other requirements of the Contract Documents; provided, however, that nothing herein shall limit in any way the rights and remedies of the Owner as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. b. If the Owner determines the Contractor has successfully complied with provisions of the Recovery Schedule, the Owner will direct the Contractor to return to the use of the approved Construction Schedule. 2.4 SCHEDULE REVISIONS A. Should Contractor desire to or be required under the Contract Documents to make modifications or changes in his method of operation, his sequence of Work or the durations of activities in the Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall do so in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Revisions to the approved Construction Schedule shall be identified by Contractor in writing and approved in writing by Owner prior to incorporation into the approved schedule. B. Logic modifications associated with change orders shall affect only those activities and performance dates directly concerned. Adjustments in scheduled intermediate Completion CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

31 Dates or for the Contract as a whole will be considered only to the extent that there is insufficient remaining float to absorb these changes. C. Revisions to Contractor s Construction Schedule required under terms of this Section shall not modify the Contract Time or any Milestone Date and shall not modify or limit the Contractor s obligations under this Contract. D. If there are separate contractors on the Project, prior to the submission by the Contractor of proposed schedule revision, the Contractor shall meet with and gain written approval of the separate contractors to make the revisions which shall be evidenced by the signatures of said separate contractors on the proposed schedule revisions. If accepted by the Owner the revisions shall be binding upon Contractor and all separate contractors on the Project. 1. Separate contractors include hazardous material remediation contractor. Schedule shall address testing and monitoring associated with remediation. E. Submittal of any proposed schedule revisions by the Contractor certifies that he will prosecute the Work in accordance with the schedule revision, subject to any change therein which is implemented in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording, at a minimum, the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A or alternate form acceptable to Architect. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

32 B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week in advance of the regularly scheduled monthly meeting designated for the review of the project schedule by the Architect. 1. Revise schedule after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Start Dates, Actual Finish Dates and an accurate Completion Percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, and additional parties determined by the Contractor. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

33 SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section Payment Procedures for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Division 01 Section Construction Progress Documentation for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 1 Section Closeout Procedures for submitting warranties, record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

34 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Electronic (CADD) Files: The Contractor may request electronic (CADD) files utilizing the Architect s Request Form. B. Completeness: Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each Submittal shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and optional feature proposed to be incorporated into the Project. 1. Incomplete submittals may be returned without action. Incomplete submittal packages returned without action or for additional information are not subject to delay claims. C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 5. Color Selection: In individual specification sections, specific items are identified which require color/finish selections to be made by the Architect from color chart or sample submittals. The Submittal Schedule prepared by the Architect identifies these required color/finish submittals. The Architect will make coordinated selections of colors/finishes for the building interior, present the resulting color concepts to the Owner for approval, and prepare the actual Color Schedule for the Work. a. Submittals requiring color selection must be submitted by Contractor and approved by Architect for conformance with Contract Documents prior to the start of the color selection process. When the submittals have been approved for conformance with Contract Documents, the process for color selection, presentation of color concepts, Owner approval, and Color Schedule preparation will begin. b. After approval of all interior color related submittals for conformance with Contract Documents, the Contractor shall allow a minimum of thirty (30) days for the color selection, Owner s approval process, and preparation of the Color Schedule. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

35 D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, in accordance with General Conditions and as follows. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow sufficient time days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow sufficient time days for review of each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing or to allow for a resubmittal, if necessary. E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification. 5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

36 1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810, or other approved form. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Electronic submittals are acceptable on this project. Prior to construction, the Contractor and Architect shall discuss the method for exchanging files. Use of the Architect s Newforma InfoExchange website and procedures can be used at no charge. If the Contractor chooses to use a different platform and methodology: 2. The Architect may reject the methodology or platform proposed and. 1) use the Architect s Newforma InfoExchange website, or 2) the project team will revert to traditional hard-copy exchange b. or the Contractor shall bear the cost of software, licensing, training etc for the project team to participate. 3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

37 5. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Quality Requirements. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer s printed and published installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. f. Testing by recognized testing agency. g. Application of testing agency labels and seals. h. Notation of coordination requirements. i. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data as PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings as PDF electronic file. 4. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 5. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

38 6. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 8. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 9. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Construction Progress Documentation. E. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Payment Procedures. F. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Payment Procedures. G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

39 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Submit subcontract list as PDF electronic file. H. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. I. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. J. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. K. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. L. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. M. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. P. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. Q. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Quality Requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

40 R. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. T. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data. V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures. C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

41 of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. D. Perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. E. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect s approval thereof. F. Direct specific attention, in writing on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to revisions not specifically identified in writing or requested by the Architect. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections required, and return it. The Architect will attach a comment sheet that will indicate what action the Contractor shall take. Actions and review procedure will be clarified at the Preconstruction Conference. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval as noted from Architect. E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

42 SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section Construction Progress Documentation for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

43 D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades. J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, experienced means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

44 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections. 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

45 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

46 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

47 e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at the Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. L. Department Entrance Mockups: Construct complete in place mockup of one department entrance at location agreed to with the Architect incorporating required materials and assemblies, finished in accordance with requirement to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

48 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures. D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

49 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents as a component of the Contractor's qualitycontrol plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Special Inspections and Tests: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special inspections and tests required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

50 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section Execution. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

51 SECTION REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Approved : The term approved, when used in conjunction with Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. Directed : Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect, and similar phrases. D. Indicated : The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the user locate the reference. E. Regulations : The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish : The term furnish means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install : The term install describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. Provide : The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. I. Installer : An installer is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as carpentry does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. The term experienced, when used with the term installer, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Replace : The term replace means to provide an acceptable like product or material in the place of a missing or unacceptable (rejected) product or material. To replace an unacceptable product or material includes its removal and disposal. (The term reinstall shall be used to indicate reuse of the original.) 07/13/18 REFERENCES

52 L. Punch List : A punch list is a listing of work items required by the Contract Documents which are incomplete or non-conforming. The list of observed deficiencies is compiled in the course of review to determine if the Contractor has attained Substantial Completion. It does not constitute a definitive list of remaining work items, and does not limit, amend or supersede requirements of the Contract Documents. Completion of punchlist items is a requirement to achieve Substantial Completion, in accordance with the General Conditions. M. Project site is the space available for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of Project. The extent of Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. N. Written or Printed when used in conjunction with manufacturer s product handling and installation requirements means to comply with the manufacturer s current printed and published information. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request. D. Abbreviations and Names: Abbreviations and acronyms are frequently used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents to represent the name of a trade association, standards-developing organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity in the context of referencing a standard or publication. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of these entities. Refer to Gale Research's Encyclopedia of Associations or Columbia Books' National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S., which are available in most libraries. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION /13/18 REFERENCES

53 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Summary for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Facility Use Maintenance of Operations Plan: Provide floor plan drawings showing temporary facilities and sequence of work and demonstrate how access will be maintained to Owner occupied areas throughout construction prior to beginning construction operations. B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

54 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches at every access point to the work area and change as required to prevent dust from being tracked into adjacent occupied areas. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Storage Areas: Refer to Special Conditions of the Contract. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: 1. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

55 in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section Closeout Procedures. C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with fourstage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section Summary. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, provided the facilities are maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. 2. Wash Facilities: Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel. 3. Drinking-Water: Bottled-water, drinking-water units, or drinking water fountains connected to permanent or temporary potable water source. C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Provide measures and equipment to meet warranty requirements of interior woodwork, specified in Division 6 and 12 Sections. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped airfiltration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

56 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped vacuum equipment. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. If permanent lighting is not available at time of installation of interior finishes, provide temporary lighting that simulates permanent lighting conditions during installation of interior finishes. I. Telephone/Cable Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. A total of three separate dedicated lines are required. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. A total of two separate dedicated lines are required. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

57 J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 3. Establish a smoking area outside the building for construction personnel since smoking within the building will not be permitted. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C. Parking: Parking areas for construction personnel is limited; refer to Special Conditions of the Contract for parking information. D. Project Signs: Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Project signs are not part of the Contract. If the Contractor elects to provide Project identification signs, comply with layout and details indicated on Drawings. Submit proposed sign for Owner approval. Install signs in location(s) to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section Execution. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered tools and equipment and not temporary facilities. I. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted in accordance with the Special Conditions of the Contract, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

58 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. J. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided egress is not impeded and stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section Summary. C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as required by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-underside of deck above dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions which also restrict occupancy with uniformly painted ½ thick FRT plywood, or 5/8 Type X gypsum board on each side of the partition and painted on occupied side, frame using cold formed steel framing spaced in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. Provide cold formed steel kickers at 4-0 on center or as otherwise required to support and stabilize partitions. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

59 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 5. Provide doors in temporary partitions where needed for egress, to the satisfaction of the Building Inspector. I. Protect existing HVAC equipment from intrusion of dust, dirt and debris during alteration construction operations. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

60 B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section Closeout Procedures. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

61 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section Alternates for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section Substitution Procedures for requests for substitutions. 3. Division 01 Section References for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term product includes the terms material, equipment, system, and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that are equivalent to or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words basis-of-design product, including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in Comparable Products Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

62 request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures. Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces, if any. Coordinate location with Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

63 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

64 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in Comparable Products Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in Comparable Products Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in Comparable Products Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require match Architect's sample, provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section Substitution Procedures for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when all of the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

65 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

66 SECTION EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Conveying systems. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

67 i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Equipment supports. e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's current printed and published (written) instructions and recommendations for storing and installing products and equipment in applications indicated. Maintain copies on-site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

68 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section Project Management and Coordination. D. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages in the construction. E. Coordinate delivery of items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

69 F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section Summary. E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

70 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 6. New Masonry Openings: Cut back existing masonry for new openings; remove whole masonry units to suit opening size indicated. Cut masonry unit jambs are not acceptable. Do not remove excessive amounts of existing masonry. G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. New Masonry Openings: Tooth in new matching masonry to build opening size required. Incorporate new lintel where required. 5. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 6. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. H. Existing Concrete Floor Surface: Provide trowelable leveling and patching compounds. Compounds shall be latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. Coordinate with Division 09 flooring specifications. Prepare concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer s printed and published instructions, including shot-blasting the substrate, to ensure proper adhesion of the leveling and patching compounds. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

71 I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2/27/2015 EXECUTION

72 H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section Quality Requirements. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION /27/2015 EXECUTION

73 SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Recycling non-hazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. 1. The Waste Management Plan shall contain the following information, as a minimum: a. A spreadsheet, which lists: 1) Each waste stream leaving the site (example: steel, concrete, cardboard, trash) 2) The name and address of the receiving entity 3) Contact name and phone number at the receiving entity b. A narrative, which describes: 1) Who is the primary person responsible for implementing the CWM plan 2) What wastes must be separated for recycling 3) How hazardous wastes are to be handled CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

74 4) How the construction waste management plan, including updates, will be communicated to all involved parties (example: CWM will be on the agenda of all construction progress meetings) 5) How the construction waste management plan will be enforced 6) How data will be tracked and filed (important: receipts must be legible and must include the name of the hauler, the date hauled, the material hauled, the weight or volume of material hauled) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section Temporary Facilities and Controls for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section Temporary Facilities and Controls for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Procedures: 1. Remove debris daily in accordance with Special Conditions of the Contract. 3.3 RECYCLING CARPET A. Recycle any non-asbestos-contaminated carpet in accordance with selected carpet recycling facility guidelines. Carpet will need to be free of any metal (tacks, nails, stretcher strips, etc.), kept dry, shaken to remove loose debris, and carefully rolled, bound, and protected from further contamination and elements. 1. Acceptable removal may require a carpet installer. B. Available recyclers include, but are not limited to, the following: CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

75 1. InterFace Flor ReEntry 2.0 Program, (800) Champion Polymer Recycling, Division of Infiltrator Systems, Inc. (800) RM Brokerage, (703) Ace Recycling (804) RECYCLING CEILING TILES AND PANELS A. Verify that existing acoustical ceiling panels can be recycled. Following verification, remove from the project site daily and stack ceiling tiles on pallets and wrap or band the pallet loads for delivery per recycler guidelines. 1. If following the Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program or the USG Ceiling Recycling Program, contact them once there is a full trailer load, or 30,000 square feet of removed ceiling, and Armstrong or USG will arrange for a track to pick up the material and transfer it to its nearest manufacturing facility at no cost. a. Where quantities are less than 30,000 square feet of removed ceiling, contact Armstrong or USG for possible consolidation delivery points at Contractor s cost. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site daily and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

76 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Execution for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section Project Record Documents for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section Demonstration and Training for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 ABOVE-CEILING WORK: A. Complete above-ceiling work prior to installation of finish ceilings. Coordinate with the Owner's third-party contractors, such as data network and security systems, if any. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

77 B. Complete or correct deficiencies, if any, noted by Architect, Owner and local authorities having jurisdiction or confirm with Architect that any such deficiencies may be completed or corrected at a later date without obstructing installation of ceilings. C. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction to obtain required above-ceiling reviews. Complete or correct above-ceiling work to comply with directives issued by the reviewing authorities. Upon completion or correction, certify in writing that all the items cited by reviewing authority have been completed or corrected and submit copies to the local authority, Owner, and Architect. D. Following completion of Items A, B and C above, the ceiling may be enclosed. Coordinate installation of acoustical ceiling hold-down clips, if any, with late stage activities such as HVAC testing and balancing and data network testing. 1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. Substantial Completion shall be for entire scope of Work unless Owner has previously agreed to an alternative arrangement. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Retain Schedule of Maintenance Material Items Subpara below when documentation of maintenance material item submittal is required for Project. b. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain signature of Owner s agent for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

78 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. Demonstrate that air and water systems are balanced and that automatic temperature control system is in control of all equipment as indicated. This may require separate demonstrations if controls cannot be tested for applicable seasons of the year. 4. Submit written certification that all special inspections have been completed. 5. Submit written certification that all Building Commissioning has been completed, and as required by the appropriate Sections. 6. Submit written certification that testing/adjusting/balancing operations have been completed, and that systems are operational and under control in conformance with requirements of Section Complete testing of the electronic security equipment demonstrating security control. 8. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 9. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section Demonstration and Training. 10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 11. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.8 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section Payment Procedures. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

79 and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding interior in numbered order of Architect s finish schedule. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

80 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title WARRANTIES, Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. b. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults and similar spaces. d. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

81 g. Remove labels that are not permanent. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. i. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. j. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grilles. k. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard Provide written report on completion of cleaning. l. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. m. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over UL and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

82 SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Submittal Procedures for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

83 C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems. 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

84 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

85 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

86 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

87 D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

88 F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section Project Record Documents. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

89 G. Comply with Section Closeout Procedures for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

90 SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Execution for final property survey. 2. Section Closeout Procedures for general closeout procedures. 3. Section Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit two paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

91 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

92 a. See Section Submittal Procedures for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation PROJECT RECORD DRAWING in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS. d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

93 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

94 SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

95 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 2. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 3. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 5. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

96 b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual. organized in coordination with requirements in Section Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

97 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan to remain in force during the construction period. B. Comply with Chapter 3 of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2 nd Edition 2007, available from SMACNA ( or SUBMITTAL A. Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (CIAQM Plan). PART 2 - OBJECTIVES DURING CONSTRUCTION 2.1 PROTECTION A. Store all materials and equipment in a protected area (inside warehouse or storage trailer). Protect materials and equipment that are too large or heavy to store in a trailer from water and dirt/dust/debris. 1. OPTION: When stored outside, provide two layers of minimum 8-mil poly on the ground and elevate equipment or material a minimum of 4 inches to allow water to run off. Secure top and sides with two layers of 8-mil poly to prevent water penetration and dust/dirt accumulation. B. Protect HVAC equipment from dust and odors. Do not store equipment in areas near painting, pressure washing, or excavation. Do not operate equipment during cutting or grinding of masonry or concrete. 1. Refer to Division 23 for construction filter requirements for protection of mechanical duct systems during construction. 2. Clean ductwork when installed. Cap ends with poly during construction to prevent contamination. 3. Do not operate HVAC system until the exterior walls, roof, glass, doors and building filters are properly installed. 4. If air handlers must be used during construction, provide filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 at each air-handling unit. Provide specified prefilters and final filters for operation during construction or install temporary 4-inch MERV 8 filters at each return air grille for operation during construction. 5. Replace all filtration media immediately prior to Substantial Completion. a. Filtration media installed in air-handling units shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8. INDOOR AIR QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

98 6. Do not perform Testing and Balancing until dust or odor generating activities are completed. 2.2 SOURCE CONTROL A. Minimize IAQ contaminants introduced by construction materials. B. Store waste construction materials a minimum of 30 feet away from the building. C. Do not smoke within 30 feet of the exterior building perimeter. 2.3 PATHWAY INTERRUPTION A. Provide barriers to contain construction areas to allow a portion of the building to be cleaned and then operate the HVAC system in that cleaned area. Acceptable barriers include dust curtains and temporary walls. 1. Protect areas of the building in which HVAC is operational by physical barriers from areas of the building not acceptable for operation of the HVAC system. B. Maintain areas within 30 feet of outdoor air intakes free of dust, dirt, debris, and volatile materials while the HVAC system is in operation. 2.4 HOUSKEEPING A. As dust accumulates at the Site, it can become airborne when disturbed by nearby activity. Similarly, spills or excess applications of products containing solvents will increase odors at the Site. Leaving the Site wet or damp for more than a day could result in the growth of mold and bacteria. Therefore, Site cleanup and maintenance is important to maintaining good IAQ during construction. B. Perform the following to control contaminants at the Site: 1. Suppress dust with wetting agents or sweeping compounds 2. Provide an efficient dust collection method (e.g. a damp rag, wet mop, or vacuum equipped with a high efficiency particulate arrester (HEPA) filter or wet scrubber). 3. Remove spills or excess applications of solvent-containing products immediately. Provide low-voc emitting spot removers and cleaning agents near occupied areas. 4. Remove accumulated water and keep work areas as dry as possible, including the use of dehumidification, if necessary. 5. Once building is enclosed, vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum cleaners to prevent settled dust from becoming airborne again. 6. Protect porous materials from exposure to moisture. Replace items that remain damp for more than four hours. END OF SECTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

99 SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. B. Division 1 Section EXECUTION for cutting and patching requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Pre-demolition Digital Photographs or Digital Video-recordings: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit to Owner s representative as part of the submittal package required prior to release of the first request for payment. 1. Prior to mobilization, Owner s representative and Contractor shall together review existing conditions in the construction and mobilization area. The Contractor in the presence of the Owner shall digitally photograph or video-record existing conditions in sufficient detail to record accurately the physical conditions at the start of construction. 2. The Contractor shall provide and the Owner and Contractor shall retain identical digital copies of the documentation. 3. At closeout the Owner s acceptance of the Work includes acceptance of the remaining existing conditions as undamaged by Contractor s forces. B. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to, above, and below, selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. The Owner and Contractor shall establish staging areas for temporary storage of furniture and furnishings removed for alteration areas during construction activities. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

100 2. The City will remove contents of the large file storage prior to construction. 3. The Contractor will be responsible for protecting adjacent furnishings and occupied areas from damage. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove loose furniture, furnishings and equipment. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Coordination of Selective Demolition Activities: Coordinate the following with Owner: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress. 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. E. Hazardous Materials: A report on the presence of hazardous materials in the Work indicated to be selectively demolished is being developed by the City s Hazardous Materials Consultant, France Environmental, Inc. and will be available to Bidders to downloaded from the City s procurement website during the bidding phase of the project. Examine this report and become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous materials shall be abated under this Contract in accordance with the hazardous materials abatement requirements identified by the City s Hazardous Materials Consultant, France Environmental, Inc. 2. A copy of the France Environmental hazardous materials abatement plans and specifications may be downloaded from the City s procurement website during the bidding phase of the project. 3. If additional materials are encountered on site that are suspected to be hazardous, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. If such materials are confirmed by the City s hazardous materials consultant to be hazardous, instructions will be provided by the hazardous materials consultant regarding the materials in question and the Contract will be adjusted by appropriate Change Order. Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner s separate hazardous materials consultant. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

101 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. At least 72 hours before starting selective demolition, meet with Owner s representative and review procedures and methods for keeping existing to remain services and utilities operational. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction digital photographs or preconstruction digital video recordings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems which will remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

102 3.4 PROTECTION b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. e. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings, furnishings, equipment, and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section Temporary Facilities and Controls. B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Secure a Hot Work Permit with the Fire Department prior to begging this type of work. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

103 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Floor Finishes: After removal of existing floor finishes including backings, remove all residual adhesives and glue. Provide grinding, sanding, or shot-blasting of existing concrete floor slab as required to achieve the proper surface to receive new indicated floor finish. Coordinate slab surface preparations required for each new indicated floor finish with appropriate subcontractor. E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by freight elevator, chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Prevent dust from escaping to adjacent areas. Method of removal shall be a manner that is acceptable to the Owner in accordance with the Special Conditions of the Contract. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

104 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

105 SECTION COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the coldformed framing design. Lesser thickness shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Structural Calculations: Design calculations, erection drawings, and detail drawings shall be submitted for review. Such drawings shall show design assumptions, procedures, truss members forces and reactions, member sizes and gages, bridging, accessory installation and details to clearly indicate proper assembly of building components. D. Design calculations, erection drawings, and detail drawings shall be sealed and signed by a professional engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia E. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. F. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. H. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Power-actuated anchors. 2. Mechanical fasteners. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

106 3. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. I. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of compliance of cold-formed metal framing with (VUSBC) building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization (ICC) acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data. C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the Commonwealth of Virginia and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and galvanized-coating thickness. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code--Steel, and AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel. G. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing: 1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

107 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. B. Provide manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration accessories, unless otherwise noted, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Gusset plates. 6. Backer plates. 2.3 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten exterior cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

108 4. Fasten interior cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing per ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

109 E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. F. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING

110 SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. For purposes of this contract, Architectural Woodwork includes (1) millwork/casework type items, (2) multi-piece cherry standing and running trim and rails associated with new bench assemblies, and (3) some specialty work requiring both shop fabricated and field assembled high quality woodwork items. Some of the work could traditionally be considered finish carpentry; because of the special composite construction and generally high quality required, all is considered architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for adhesives. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, boxes, raceways and devices, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show locations of joints in panels. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Plastic laminates. 3. Solid-surfacing materials, 3 inches square. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Labels: Provide proof of membership in AWI Quality Certification Program labels. E. Qualification Data: For fabricator. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

111 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards 2nd Edition, October 1, 2014 published jointly by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer s Association of Canada (AWMAC), and Woodwork Institute (WI) for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. Contractor, upon award of work, shall register the work under this section with the AWI Quality Certification Program. Obtain and pass a third party final inspection of architectural woodwork by the AWI Quality Certification Corporation prior to delivery. AWI program of selfcertification by manufacturer in lieu of third-party inspection is not acceptable. 3. Obtain and pass a third party final inspection of installed architectural woodwork by the AWI Quality Certification Corporation. AWI program of self-certification by manufacturer in lieu of third-party inspection is not acceptable. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in Project Conditions Article. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

112 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Cherry, plain sliced. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Feature Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Chem Metal b. Wilsonart International Decorative Metal E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. ( Corian ) *Greenguard certified (color selected from price groups 2-6) b. Formica Corporation. *Greenguard certified c. Samsung; Cheil Industries Inc. (Staron) d. Wilsonart International e. LG Hausy 2. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

113 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Fire retardant treated floor platform and like structural framing, and blocking are specified in Division 6 Section Rough Carpentry. Where such internal framing is included in the woodwork fabrications, use fire retardant treated material as indicated. No actual finish woodwork items (trim, casings, bases, casework panel and worked lumber components etc.) are fire retardant treated. B. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. D. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E For panels 3/4-inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf, respectively. E. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

114 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section Door Hardware. Provide all hardware necessary for complete and functioning cabinets whether specified or not. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening, self-closing C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B Wire Pulls: Back-mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16-inch (8 mm) in diameter. D. Handle Locks: Lever style locking disk tumbler, chrome finish, CompX International Inc. C8754, CCL Security Products 1000 Series, Eastloc Engineering L101, or equivalent. Provide model, spindle length, and accessories to suit application. E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B Provide large roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03112 for extra-large cabinet doors, such as full-height cabinets. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. a. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf. Accuride #7432, Knape & Vogt #KV8414, or Fulterer #FR 5000 Series. b. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf. Accuride #4032, Knape & Vogt #KV8500, or Fulterer #FR c. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf. Accuride #3640A, Knape & Vogt #KV8800, or Fulterer #FR 5302 d. Pencil Drawer Slides (3/4 extension): 45 lbf (200 N). Accuride #2006, Knape & Vogt #KV8200/8250, or Fulterer #FR I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 4-inch square, silver metal grommets and matching caps with protective brushes in slot for wire passage. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Doug Mockett; Max2/A-94 b. Richelieu; Square Grommet with Brush L. Wire Management: Extruded vinyl channel or trough shapes indicated. Black color and screwmounting unless noted otherwise. 1. J-shape wire manager for edge-of-counter mounting, where indicated. 1-inch wide channel, 1-1/2-inches high, with 7/16-inch slot at top for cables. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

115 M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A for BHMA finish number indicated. N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A UNDERCOUNTER UTILITY BRACES A. Undercounter Utility Braces: Heavy-duty prefabricated steel braces for full cantilevered support of countertop from rear wall without reducing knee space. Provide braces designed to accommodate leveling cleats and passage of conduit and piping and complete with predrilled holes for screw fasteners. 1. Load Capacity: 500 pounds minimum per pair at 16 inches o.c. as installed, and up to 1000 pounds per pair as fabricated. Install at 16 inches o.c. along full length of countertops unsupported by cabinetry unless indicated otherwise. 2. Size: 21 inches x 28 inches minimum for standard 30-inch deep counter unless indicated otherwise. Provide smaller sizes suitable for smaller counters as approved. 3. Finish: Factory finish baked enamel or primed and ready for field painting. Factory finish color as selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or approved equivalent: a. FastCap; SpeedBrace. b. Lyman Associates. c. Best Brackets. d. A & M Brackets. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Steel Plates and Angles: ASTM A36, shop primed, (field paint in Division 9 Section Paints ). (miscellaneous clips etc.) D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or as specified above for faces. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

116 C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4-inch Thick or Less: 1/16-inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4-inch Thick: 1/8-inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16-inch. E. Unless indicated otherwise, where wood studs are indicated, provide nominal 2 x 4 wood stud framing at 16 inches on center. F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. G. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, plain sliced. C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness. E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. F. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. G. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.8 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, plain sliced. 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of veneered panels. C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match. D. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

117 E. Panel-Matching Method: End Match. F. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous match; veneer leaves of upper panels are continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels. 2.9 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium, except as noted for drawer construction. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Reveal Dimension: 1/2-inch (13 mm). D. Cabinet Door and Drawer Fronts: Provide flush panel door and drawer fronts unless indicated otherwise. E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Cherry, plain sliced. 1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match. 5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. 6. Comply with veneer and other matching requirements indicated for blueprint-matched paneling. F. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Per AWI standard for Custom Grade, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Per AWI standard for Custom Grade, 1/2 inch minimum SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS AND WALL CAP A. Grade: Premium. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2-inch. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application. E. Drill holes in countertops for grommets in shop. F. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with agglomerate stone surfacing material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

118 1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 9 painting Sections for material and application requirements. C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 9 painting Sections for material and application requirements. D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of all transparent finish woodwork, as required for AWI premium grade. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer. (previous AWI edition #TR-2) 3. AWI Finish System: Acrylic lacquer. 4. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. (previous AWI edition #TR-4) 5. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed vinyl. 6. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane. (previous AWI edition #TR-6) 7. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 8. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing. 9. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 10. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. a. Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling. 11. Sheen: Satin, gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

119 B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8-inch in 96 inches. H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16-inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8- inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. I. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Resilient base at base cabinets (all exposed sides) is specified in Division 9 Section Resilient Base and Accessories. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

120 4. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 5. Present keys to Owner s representative. Identify keys by room number and casework type. Obtain receipt from Owner. J. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section Joint Sealants. K. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. L. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

121 SECTION JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested: 1. Joint-sealant location and designation. 2. Manufacturer and product name. 3. Type of substrate material. 4. Proposed test. 5. Number of samples required. D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion. E. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS

122 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials. 3. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers. 6. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS

123 B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period - Silicone: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period - Urethane: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, except provide custom colors matching Architect s samples for exterior sealants, for each type. C. Provide joint sealants for interior STC-rated acoustical applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates, while maintaining indicated partition STC rating. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS JS-2 (includes standard and non-staining formulations) A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, non-sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2700 SilPruf LM. b. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-290. c. Pecora Corporation; 890 NST. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. e. Dow Corning Corporation; URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS JS-4 (includes standard and immersible formulations) A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, non-sag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. JOINT SEALANTS

124 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. c. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic. e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS JS-7 A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS JS-5 A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS AS-1 A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 826 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; RCS20 Acoustical. c. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. e. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. f. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: JOINT SEALANTS

125 a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems. b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, either Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. JOINT SEALANTS

126 3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Porcelain enamel. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Provide sealant for all joints where sealant is not specified in other Sections. Seal all joints between dissimilar materials, unless indicated otherwise. 2. For interior partitions indicated to be full height, seal all penetrations and joints unless indicated otherwise. 3. For STC-rated partitions, provide sealant on both sides of partition. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. JOINT SEALANTS

127 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical and perimeter joints on concealed surfaces of interior unit masonry, concrete, panel full-height walls and partitions, and panel acoustic STC-rated walls and partitions. Refer to other Division 9 Sections for acoustical sealant included as part of assembly installations. 1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical and Smoke Joint Sealant AS FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations meet specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare results to determine if adhesion meets sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. JOINT SEALANTS

128 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS Joint Locations: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics JS Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. b. Sill plates. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. JOINT SEALANTS

129 2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Acoustical joints on concealed surfaces of interior unit masonry, concrete, and panel full-height walls and partitions. 1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical and Smoke Joint Sealant AS Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Acoustical joints on exposed and concealed surfaces of interior unit masonry, concrete, and panel acoustic STC-rated walls and partitions. 1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical and Smoke Joint Sealant AS Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS

130 SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Indicate shop fabricated components of large HM frame assemblies requiring field assembly, and detail site joinery required for site-assembly to maintain uniform sightlines. 5. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 6. Details of each different wall opening condition. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 10. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

131 D. Smoke-control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 and UL 1784 and label doors per UL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of exterior door frames with air barrier to maintain continuity of air- and vapor barrier between adjacent opaque wall area and door frames. C. Coordinate with Owner s access control vendor for security provisions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Black Mountain Door, LLC. (formerly Amweld) 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 7. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

132 D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476 and maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section Glazing. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from galvanized-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: inch- thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet or metallic-coated sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: inch- thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Wood Doors: inch- thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: inch- thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than inch thick. 3. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

133 B. Floor Anchors: Formed of same material as frames, minimum inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. Provide where indicated or required. 2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 1. Provide standard 5/8-inch height stops for interior fixed glazing (glass or polycarbonate). 2. Provide security torx head fasteners at all stops inside the security perimeter of the jail. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than inch thick. C. Provide custom break metal grout guard fabrications for closure and air barrier termination flange applications; form from same materials as frames. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

134 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section Door Hardware. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Divisions 26 Sections. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A acceptance criteria; recommended by primer STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

135 manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Finish: Manufacturer's standard rust prohibitive treatment by dry passivation process ( paint grip ) or factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

136 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section Glazing and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Exterior Fixed Glazing: Confirm existence and placement of flashing at sill. Install frame as indicated. For face welded (not full profile welded) frames, provide body putty at hairline joints between frame sections and finish flush and suitable for painted finish. Furnish glazier glazing applied stops of depth to match frame stop and width indicated. 2. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. Provide security torx head type within the secure perimeter. 3. Provide non-removable glazing stops on corridor side of interior frames. If frame is not located on corridor, provide stops on the larger room side of the frame. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and soiling material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

137 SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Undercuts. 4. Requirements for veneer matching. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factoryfinished doors. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

138 C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers PC-5 with LD-2 core: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. VT Industries, Inc. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards. 1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into the NFPA 252 test, the neutral pressure level in the furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. 1. Per NFPA 80, fire exit doors shall be labeled Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware, and shall be reinforced and constructed to maintain the rating of the specific listed and labeled fire exit devices mounted on them. 2. For fire doors bearing the Smoke and Draft Control Door S marking, provide UL Classified Category H gasketing materials. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

139 3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 5. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde. 2. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices and doors indicated to receive surface-mounted closers. D. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Species: Red oak. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Veneers for all doors in the Work well-matched for color and grain as approved. 8. Transom Match: Continuous match. 9. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A. 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

140 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section Glazing. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards System 5, conversion varnish or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

141 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section Door Hardware. B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire door assemblies per NFPA 80, the door and frame manufacturers installation instructions, and manufacturers listing requirements. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Adjust installed clearances to meet factory fitting requirements indicated for fabrication. Replace doors that do not meet clearance requirements. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS

142 SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware. C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule. 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. DOOR HARDWARE

143 D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products meet requirements. F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with local warehousing facilities and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant who is experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A117.1, as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape easy to grasp with one hand and not requiring tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following opening-force requirements: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: Maximum 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force per authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high, beveled with maximum slope of 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: DOOR HARDWARE

144 a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section Project Management and Coordination. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Requirements for key control system. 3. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated below. a. Locksets: Seven (7) years from date of Sale. b. Manual Closers: Twenty Five (25) years from date of Sale. DOOR HARDWARE

145 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. General Contractor: turn over to owner after installation of hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturer s that may be incorporated into the Work are the following: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies b. McKinney Products Company c. Bommer 2. Aluminum Continuous Geared Hinges: a. Hager Companies b. Pemko c. Select Products Limited B. Quantity: As scheduled. C. Size: Provide sizes scheduled. D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless-steel 2. Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin or Stainless steel as scheduled DOOR HARDWARE

146 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: 1. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Out-swinging exterior doors. 2. Corners: Square. F. Continuous-Hinges: Fabricated to full height of door and frame. Fabricate hinges to template screw locations. G. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Corbin Russwin CL3300 Series No Substitutes B. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series C. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated. D. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories: 1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. E. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lever: Cast 2. Escutcheon (Rose): Wrought 3. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset design designated in the hardware sets. F. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: ANSI A G. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 5/8-inch latchbolt throw. H. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sargent-ASSA Abloy-8500 Series 2. Von Duprin-33 Series 3. Corbin Russwin-ED4000 Series B. Certified Products: Exit devices listed in BHMA's Directory of Certified Exit Devices. DOOR HARDWARE

147 C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. D. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. E. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder material and finish to match locksets. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 KEYING SYSTEM A. Key all locks and cylinders to the existing Corbin/Russwin system, 59A1 keyway. B. Locks shall be keyed in sets or sub-sets as directed by the owner s instructions. 2.6 KEY REQUIREMENTS A. Upon receipt of approved Hardware Schedule the general contractor should arrange a meeting with the lock manufacturer s representative and the owner s representative to obtain and determine necessary keying information. 1. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass, bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. 2. All locksets, exit devices, and padlocks shall accept the same core type. 3. Doors shall be furnished with a construction master keying system if possible for interim use during construction. Construction keying is by the hardware supplier. All temporary construction cores are the property of the door hardware supplier and must be returned to the supplier at the time of job completion. Note: Construction keying may not be possible for existing key systems. B. Stamp each key and core face with the keyset symbol and stamp each master key with keyset symbol as applicable. 1. Provide change keys in individual envelopes for each cylinder delivered. 2. Envelopes shall be marked with respective door identification numbers. 3. The inscription Do Not Duplicate shall be stamped on all change keys. C. Keys shall be supplied as follows: 1. Grandmaster Keys: Three (3) 2. Masterkeys (each Masterkey set): Five (5) 3. Change Keys per Lock: Two (2) 2.7 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Removable Mullions: a. Sargent Manufacturing Company. b. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company c. Corbin Russwin 2.8 SURFACE-MOUNTED CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: DOOR HARDWARE

148 1. LCN Closers-4040XP 2. Norton Door Controls Sargent Manufacturing Co.-351 B. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1 C. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's Directory of Certified Door Closers. D. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.9 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Protective Trim Units(Kick/Mop Plates): a. Hager Companies b. Ives: H. B. Ives c. Rockwood Manufacturing Co. B. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed countersunk fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws. C. Furnish protection plates sized 2 inches less than door width on the push side and 1 inch less than door width on the pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule 2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Rixson 2. Sargent 3. Glynn Johnson 4. Rockwood Manufacturing Co. B. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1. C. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1. D. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Provide floor, wall, or overhead stops as specified in the hardware sets DOOR GASKETING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Door Gasketing: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Zero International d. Hager Companies 2. Door Bottoms: DOOR HARDWARE

149 a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Zero International d. Hager Companies B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to door bottom, forming seal with threshold when door is closed THRESHOLDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. National Guard Products, Inc. 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3. Zero International 4. Hager Companies 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hager Companies 2. H. B. Ives Co. 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company B. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA Grade 1, unless otherwise indicated FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: DOOR HARDWARE

150 a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors. Supply wood screws for wood door applications. Self boring/drilling screws are not to be used FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if within the range of approved Samples and assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated below: 1. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over brass or bronze base metal. 2. BHMA 628: Satin solid aluminum, clear anodized. 3. BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin solid stainless steel. 4. BHMA 652 (US26D): Satin chromium plated over steel base metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series. Drill properly sized pilot holes for all wood screw applications. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. DHI WDHS.3, Locations for Wood Doors. The hollow metal frame manufacturer s standard hardware locations are acceptable. DOOR HARDWARE

151 B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section Joint Sealants. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. Adjust the opening force upon installation of all door closers so that ADA compliance is achieved. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, and door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion HW-1 110A, 110C 3 EACH HINGE T4A ½ X 4 ½ US26D NRP 1 EACH LOCKSET CL3357 PZD A1 1 EACH ELECTRIC STRIKE 4500C 630 X 2005M3 1 EACH POWER SUPPLY AQD3 1 EACH CLOSER CPS EACH KICK PLATE K X 2 LDW US32D CSK 1 EACH FLOOR 445 US26D 3 EACH SILENCERS 608 DOOR HARDWARE

152 CARD READER, DOOR POSITION SWITCH, AND REX DEVICE BY ACCESS CONTROL PROVIDER. HW-2 111A, 112B 3 EACH HINGE T4A ½ X 4 ½ US26D 1 EACH PASSAGE CL3310 PZD EACH CLOSER EACH KICK PLATE K X 2 LDW US32D CSK 1 EACH OH STOP 590S EACH SILENCERS 608 HW-3 112A 3 EACH HINGE T4A ½ X 4 ½ US26D 1 EACH PASSAGE 3310 PZD EACH CLOSER PR EACH KICK PLATE K X 2 LDW US32D CSK 1 WACH WALL STOP 403 US26D 3 EACH SILENCERS 608 HW-4 110B 6 EACH HINGE T4A ½ X 4 ½ US26D 2 EACH FLUSH BOLTS EACH D.P. STRIKE EACH LOCKSET CL3357 PZD A1 1 EACH CLOSER CLP (ACTIVE) 1 EACH OH STOP 1540S 626 (INACTIVE) 2 EACH SILENCERS 608 HW-5 AUTO OPERATOR FOR EXISTING DOOR 100A BY OTHER TRADES. HW-6 MAG LOCKS FOR DOOR 100B BY OTHER TRADES. END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE

153 SECTION AUTOMATIC [POWER] DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/BHMA A156.19: Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors. B. BHMA A Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. C. UL 325 Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. D. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide power door operators capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F to 130 deg F. C. Opening-Force Requirements: In the event power failure to the operator, doors shall open with a manual force, not to exceed 30 lb applied at 1 from the latch edge of the door. 1. Automatic: Push Plate actuates door open; door closes after time delay expires. Opening and closing force, measured 1" out from the lock stile of the door, not to exceed 15 pounds of force to stop the door when operating in either direction. 2. Manual: Manually pushing door activates automatic opening cycle; door closes after time delay expires. D. Break Away Requirements: Shall require no more than 50 lb applied at 1 from the latch edge of the door. E. Door Energy: The kinetic energy of a door in motion shall not exceed 1.25 lbd-ft. F. Closing Time: 1. Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 5 seconds or longer. 2. Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 10 degrees to fully closed in not less than 1.5 seconds. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include material descriptions and finishes. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

154 B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. Indicate wiring for electrical supply. C. Color Samples for selection of factory-applied color finishes. D. Owner s Manual and Warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility certified under ISO 9001 and with company certificate issued by AAADM. C. Certifications: Power door operators shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the References indicated herein. D. Source Limitations: Obtain power door operators through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. F. Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for swinging automatic doors serving as a required means of egress. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings to receive power door operators by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Mounting Surfaces: Verify all surfaces are plumb, straight and secure; substrates are proper dimension and material. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Templates: Confirm adequate provisions are provided for locating and installing power door operators to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of power door operators with connections to power supplies. C. System Integration: Integrate power door operators with surrounding components, materials, and systems as required for a complete working installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Units shall be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for a period of one year from Substantial Completion date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: Stanley Access Technologies; Magic-Access Series power door operator. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

155 B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Horton Automatics: Series 4000LE 2. DORMA ED Norton 6960 PowerMatic Low Energy 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Headers: 6063-T6. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B Sheet and Plate: ASTM B COMPONENTS A. Header Case: Header case approximately 6-1/8 inch x 4 inch in rectangular section and fabricated from extruded aluminum with structurally integrated end caps, designed to conceal door operators and controls. The operator shall be sealed against dust, dirt, and corrosion within the header case. Access to the operator and electronic control box shall be provided by a fulllength removable cover, edge rabbetted to the header to ensure a flush fit. Removable cover shall be secured to prevent unauthorized access. B. Door Arms and Linkage Assembly: A combination of door arms and linkage shall provide positive control of door through entire swing; units shall permit use of butt hung, center pivot, and offset pivot-hung doors. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. D. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A SWINGING DOOR OPERATORS A. Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer based on models indicated and for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Operators: Self-contained units powered by a minimum fractional horsepower, permanentmagnet AC or DC motors. 1. Electro-mechanical Operator: Transmit power from operator to door through reduction gear train, splined spindle, door arm, and linkage assembly. Drive train shall have positive constant engagement. 2. Operation: Power opening and spring closing. 3. Mounting: Visible 4. Features: a. Adjustable opening, open check, and closing speeds. b. Adjustable opening force. c. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. d. Reverse on obstruction. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

156 C. Closing Operation: Operator shall close the door by spring energy employing the motor, as a dynamic brake to provide closing speed control. Closing spring shall be adjustable for positive closing action at a low material stress level for long spring life. D. Manual Use: Operator shall function as a manual door closer in the direction of swing with or without electrical power. Operator shall deliver an even, consistent open force across the entire transition from door fully closed to door fully open. E. Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Electrical. Minimum service to be 120 VAC, 5 amps for single doors. 2.5 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Electrical Control System: Electrical control system shall include a solid state controller with quick connect plugs. B. Controller Protection: Controller shall incorporate the following features to ensure trouble free operation: 1. Fuse protection. 2. Electronic surge protection. 3. Internal power supply protection. C. Program Dip Switches: Controller shall have program dip switches to allow selection or change at the following parameters: timer logic, single or dual door, and activation options. 2.6 ACTIVATION DEVICES A. Push Plates: Provide approximately 4 ½ inch square SPDT push plates with UL listed switch. Face plates and mounting studs shall be stainless steel. Face plates shall be engraved with the international symbol for accessibility and Push To Open. 1. Push plates shall be wall mounted in single or double gang electrical boxes and hardwired to door operator controls. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes. B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A31 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.40 mils minimum complying with AAMA , and the following: 1. AAMA Applicator shall be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

157 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of swinging automatic doors. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Mounting: Install power door operators/headers plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, arms and linkages level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each swinging automatic door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards. B. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, and complying with requirements in ANSI A by AAADM Certified Technician. C. Clean surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

158 SECTION COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch unless indicated otherwise or as required by ASTM C 754 to meet L/240 deflection limit at a lateral pressure of 5psf. Provide inch ASTM C 1178 tile backing panels and ASTM C 1629 Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board, and at HM door frames. Provide minimum inch b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; MaxTrack Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 3) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS)

159 D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: inch. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, inch-thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch, unless indicated otherwise. G. Corner Angle: Angle with both face flanges of 2-1/2 inches, minimum bare metal thickness of inch. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, inch-diameter wire, or double strand of inch-diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Post-installed, expansion anchor. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, or as required. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch, unless indicated otherwise. F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. The USG Drywall Suspension System accessory components for inside and outside corner joinery of main grid members for construction of boxed soffits and bulkheads without stud partition framing is acceptable in lieu of stud framed soffit type construction. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS)

160 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch-thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Provide framing to meet L/240 deflection limit at a lateral pressure of 5psf unless indicated otherwise. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if required by ASTM C 754 to meet L/240 deflection limit at a lateral pressure of 5psf. COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS)

161 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate 4 inches above highest adjacent suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports; including roof decking, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to masonry with screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Off Furring: 1. Where steel framing is indicated directly beside a primary wall and to receive finish board on only one side, provide bracing to the primary wall at no less than 48 inches o.c. between floor and ceiling. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS)

162 C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION COLD FORMED STEEL FRAMING - NON-STRUCTURAL (CFSF-NS)

163 SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. GYPSUM BOARD

164 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Light Weight Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396 with engineered high-strength, light weight gypsum core in 5/8-inch thickness may be used in lieu of standard weight 5/8-inch gypsum board for non-fire-rated applications only. (This new 5/8-inch thickness product is not a Type X board and is not tested for fire-rated assemblies.) 1. Core: 5/8-inch, regular type. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Non-Type X Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond High Strength Fire-Shield LITE 30. b. USG Corporation; UltraLight Panels Firecode 30 B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment. c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. d. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker. f. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. g. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: Nominal 5/8 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. No-Coat synthetic-reinforced trim may be used in lieu of paper-faced galvanized steel sheet for cornerbead applications. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Control/ expansion joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. GYPSUM BOARD

165 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units (at tile backing): As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from to inch thick. (CFSF specified in Division 05 Section Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Structural. ) 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: GYPSUM BOARD

166 a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Hilti CP506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. e. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. f. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control/ expansion joints at corners of framed openings. E. Install gypsum board with open horizontal joint (gap) not to exceed ½-inch above finished floor slab and tape & finish vertical joints to bottom edge of board to afford a smooth substrate for applied wall base. F. Form control/expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim GYPSUM BOARD

167 edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. I. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board ceilings at surrounding non-gypsum board construction. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with LC-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed and U-bead edge trim where concealed. Seal joints between edges and surrounding non-gypsum wall surfaces with acoustical sealant. J. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. GYPSUM BOARD

168 B. Control/ Expansion Joints: Principal aesthetic and functional control/expansion joint locations are indicated on Drawings. Provide additional control/ expansion joints as required by ASTM C 840. If additional control/expansion joints are required in high visibility spaces such as Lobbies and Public Meeting Rooms, advise Architect of proposed location. C. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control/expansion joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing. GYPSUM BOARD

169 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD

170 SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 6 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not below 70 deg F or above 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: hours before installation. 2. During installation hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

171 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE <RB> A. Resilient Base: 1. Available Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) Products: Provide one of the following or alternate complying material acceptable to Architect. a. Burke Flooring, Division of Burke Industries; BurkeBase - Cove Base. b. Flexco (USA), Inc.; Wallflowers Premium Cove. c. Nora Rubber Flooring; 4" Cove Base S1028 B. d. Roppe Corporation; Pinnacle Rubber Base Style B (Cove). B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F Material Requirement and Manufacturing Group: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside and Inside Corners: Job formed. G. Finish: Satin H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Burke Flooring, Division of Burke Industries b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). e. Roppe Corporation, USA. f. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, joiner for tile and carpet and transition strips. 1. Carpet edge for glue-down applications: Roppe #38 or #39 to suit carpet thickness 2. Reducer strip for resilient flooring 1/8 inch x 1 inch: Roppe #22 3. Reducer strip for resilient flooring 3/16 inch x 1 inch: Roppe #23 4. Reducer strip for resilient flooring 1/8 inch x 1.5 inch: Roppe #45 5. Joiner for tile and carpet 7/32 inch tile: Roppe #50 C. Material: Rubber. D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

172 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

173 E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

174 SECTION TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 02 Section Selective Structure Demolition for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section Resilient Base and Accessories for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. TILE CARPETING

175 C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Prequalifications: Manufacturers seeking consideration as an acceptable alternative to the specified carpet tile material must submit samples, specifications and certified test data a minimum of 10 days prior to receipt of bids to the Architect. Materials not meeting all product, technical and performance criteria will not be considered. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, Storage and Handling. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7 Site Conditions All Installations Section 11 Ventilation. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have ph range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, and delamination. TILE CARPETING

176 3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.. 2. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to cover high density file platform in spaces 423 and 446. Carpet tiles to be installed by high density file vendor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE PRODUCTS: Provide specified carpet tile. No substitutions will be considered after award of Contract. 2.2 CARPET TILE (C-Tile) A. Manufacturer: Mannington Commercial 1. Contact: Kiersten Stinson (804) Product Name: Husk 3. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. Fiber Content: Invista Antron Legacy Type 6,6 5. Dye Method: Solution Dyed 6. Gauge: 5/64 Inches 7. Stitches: 10 per inch 8. Pile Thickness:.140 Inches 9. Tufted Weight: 22 oz/sq yd 10. Backing: Infinity Modular Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer 11. Size: 24 x 24 inch 12. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. TILE CARPETING

177 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7 Site Conditions All Installations, and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 18 Modular Carpet, and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Horizontal Brick Ashlar pattern as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer for specific pattern used. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. TILE CARPETING

178 E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Extend carpet tile to center of cased openings and to center under door leafs at door openings unless indicated otherwise. Where transitions occur to another flooring material, extend or cut carpet tile to suit transition. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 20 Protection of Indoor Installations. C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 3.5 OWNER TRAINING: A. Instruct Owner s personnel responsible for maintaining installed carpet in accordance with manufacturer s published recommendations. Carpet manufacturer s technical representative shall conduct a training seminar for Owner s Lead of Facilities Maintenance and selected supervisors to demonstrate manufacturer s recommended cleaning, spot cleaning and preventive maintenance procedures of the installed carpet products. 1. Conduct the training seminar within the Substantially Completed facility, utilizing cleaning equipment purchased by the Owner for facilities maintenance. 2. Training seminar shall include both demonstrations and hands-on cleaning of the installed product(s) by Owner s personnel. 3. Carpet manufacturer s technical representative shall digitally record the training seminar and furnish the Owner with two (2) copies (in DVD format) for future instruction of Facilities Maintenance personnel. END OF SECTION TILE CARPETING

179 SECTION PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout Project, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. 2. Painted Patterns and Accent Colors: Location of multi-color paint patterns and accent color areas are indicated in Interior Accent Paint Color Schedule on Drawings. C. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work. (Labeling on pipes and ducts, including possible stencil lettering, is included in Division 21, 22 and 23 work.) D. Paint as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, & other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. E. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned to be painted, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes available. F. Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work. 1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not field-paint items specified for factory- or installer-finishing; such as toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork, mechanical and electrical equipment, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, and pipe spaces, and elevator and duct shafts. 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. 4. Operating Parts: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. G. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications. 1. Shop Primers: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items. PAINTING

180 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications. H. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. Do not paint over fire alarm devices, sprinklers and similar fire safety devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers, other undercoat paint, and finish coat products produced by same manufacturer for each paint system. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. 1. Test primers, bonding primers and coating products for compatibility and adhesion to existing substrates. C. Field Samples: On designated wall surfaces and other interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. D. Color Selection Sample Areas: Architect will designate required field sample area colors and locations when color schedule is issued. Final acceptance of those colors will be from jobapplied samples. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Inspection Report: Paint manufacturer s technical representative will inspect existing facility to confirm the existing paint systems, and note substrates which require bond or barrier coating to render them compatible with specified paint systems. Submit copy of report to Architect. 1. Inspector shall indentify MPI DSD 3 Degree of Surface Degradation surfaces ( severely deteriorated paint ) recommended to have paint film completely removed. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including Paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed. Include paint system schedule in the format used in this specification section. 1. For DTM enamel products, provide the following performance data. a. Abrasion Resistance test data per ASTM D4060 with CS-17 wheel, 1000 gram load for 1000 cycles. (CS-10 wheel data not acceptable). b. Direct Impact Resistance test data per ASTM D2794. c. Adhesion test data per ASTM D4541. C. Color Chips: Submit color chips of manufacturer's complete range of colors for each paint type for Architect's review of color and texture (sheen). These will be used for initial color selection if the submitted range is adequate. 1. Based on products of the selected manufacturer and paint systems specified in this Section, the Architect will prepare an initial color schedule indicating paint colors to be used in each space. The Architect will indicate required colors by referencing the PAINTING

181 selected paint manufacturer's color chips, or by referencing drawdowns or other standard (such as match laminate color ). 2. Provide 8-1/2 x 11 inch color samples ( drawdowns ) for all paint colors and sheens for which the color in Architect s color schedule is not indicated by colors of the selected paint manufacturer for approval prior to application in the field. Provide paint drawdowns in finish sheens applicable to those in the field. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take precautions to ensure workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 F and 90 F for water-base paints; and between 45 F and 95 F for solvent-thinned paints, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature and humidity limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. C. Wind: Do not spray coatings if wind velocity exceeds manufacturer's recommended limit. D. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or enclosed areas in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Dust and Contaminants: 1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants. 2. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminants during coating application and curing. PAINTING

182 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Paint Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Ben Moore). 2. Glidden Professional (Glidden) 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG) 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). (Duron, a regional division of S-W, is not acceptable) 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. B. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal based on the total non-volatile (dry-film) of paint by weight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in a manner acceptable to Applicator. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Cleaning: Before applying paint or surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. PAINTING

183 3. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Surface Preparation of Previously Painted Hard Surfaces and Steel Doors and Frames: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Test all remaining previously painted substrates for adhesion of the current coating systems using physical testing procedure ASTM D 3359 (Measuring Adhesion by Tape). 2. If indicated by testing remove all layers of poorly adhering coatings from previously coated substrates. 3. Abrade tightly adhering previously coated/ painted substrates to provide a sufficient surface profile for new coatings systems. 4. Provide barrier primers and/or bonding primers over prepared previously coated substrates and previously coated tightly adhering coating systems on all substrates. E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, and concrete block to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. F. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, suitable solvent, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 1. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling. G. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. H. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent. Provide wash coat if required by paint system manufacturer for prepared substrate. 3.3 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE FOR PREVIOUSLY PAINTED SURFACES A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting according to applicable requirements specified in this schedule. 1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to the paragraphs below. 2. Where existing degree of soiling prevents examination, preclean surface and allow it to dry before making an evaluation. B. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered. PAINTING

184 2. Paint Removal: Not required. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods to remove loose paint until only tightly adhered paint remains. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. D. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling. 2. Paint Removal: Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Sand surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. E. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 3 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film severely deteriorated, obscuring fine architectural detail work because of paint-layer buildup, and surface indicated in paint manufacturer s technical representative s inspection report to have paint completely removed. 2. Paint Removal: Completely remove paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. Remove rust. 3. Preparation for Painting: Prepare bare cleaned surface according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. 3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Maintain paint mixing and application containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.5 APPLICATION: A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Provide access to representative of selected coating manufacturer for observation of material application only at all times during painting work. Unless specifically indicated by Architect, this representative shall have no authority to make decisions about the work. PAINTING

185 2. Paint surface treatments and finishes are indicated in schedules of Contract Documents. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with prime paints used. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable and permanently fixed equipment and furniture. 6. Paint duct interior surfaces visible through registers or grilles, with flat, non-specular black paint. 7. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers. 8. Finish exterior and interior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 10. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless required to prevent show-through for finish topcoats. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish total DFT indicated or as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. Do not paint prefinished equipment items unless directed otherwise. E. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burnthrough or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Finish Coats: Provide finish quality for new and repainted surfaces as follows: 1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION: PAINTING

186 A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces. B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work until date of Substantial Completion. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. 1. Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for their work after completion of painting. 2. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up & restore all damaged painted surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Dry film thickness is noted as DFT. Provide compatibility test areas on existing painted substrates. B. Gypsum Board Systems with Latex Finish: Satin (egg-shell) finish at walls and flat finish on ceilings except as noted. Provide best commercial Low-VOC formulation with 0 VOC per EPA test method Filler Coat: 0 VOC (per EPS test method 24) Latex Primer Ben Moore: N534 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer Glidden Lifemaster No VOC Interior Primer PPG Speedhide Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer S-W: B ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 2. First & Second Finish Coats: Interior Low-VOC Acrylic Satin Finish. (Low lustre/satin = ) Provide for wall finishes unless noted or directed otherwise. Ben Moore: N538 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Eggshell Finish Glidden 1411 Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Eggshell PPG Speedhide Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Latex S-W: B ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel 3. First & Second Finish Coats: Interior Low-VOC Acrylic Flat Finish. Provide for ceiling applications unless noted or directed otherwise. Ben Moore: N536 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish Glidden 1209 Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Flat PPG Speedhide Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat S-W: B ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat C. Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss Direct to Metal ( DTM ) Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over primer, with total DFT not less than 2.5 mils. 1. Prime Coat: Lead-free, acrylic Base Primer. Not required on shop primed items. Ben Moore: P29 DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (self priming) Glidden 4020PF Devflex DTM Primer and Flat Finish PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Primer/Finish Industrial Enamel S-W: B66 W1 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (or B66 W200) 2. Bonding Primer (previously painted): Acrylic bonding primer designed for previously painted ferrous metal to ensure secure bond. Brush, spray or roller apply and back roll. Ben Moore/Insl-x 110 Stix Bonding Primer Glidden 4020PF Devflex DTM Primer and Flat Finish PAINTING

187 PPG Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer S-W: B66A50 DTM Bonding Primer 3. First and Second Coat: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. ( ) Ben Moore: P29 DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (self priming) Glidden 4216HP Devflex High Performance WB Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel S-W: B66 W200 DTM Acrylic Coating D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Semi-Gloss Direct to Metal ( DTM ) Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over primer, with min. total DFT of 2.5 mils. 1. Prime Coat: Lead-free, acrylic base interior galvanized metal primer, premium grade. Ben Moore: P04 Acrylic Metal Primer Glidden 4020PF Devflex DTM Primer and Flat Finish PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Primer/Finish Industrial Enamel S-W: B66 W200 DTM Acrylic Coating 2. First and Second Coats: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. Same as for ferrous metal. E. Painted Woodwork and Hardboard: Semi-Gloss Direct to Metal ( DTM ) Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two topcoats over undercoater. Provide at painted wood shelving, electrical panel boards, and as noted. 1. First Coat: Interior Latex Undercoat, for medium-duty, low-voc formulation. Glidden: 1000 High Hide Interior Primer-Sealer PPG Seal Grip Acrylic Latex Enamel Undercoat S-W: B28 W101 PrepRite Classic Int. Latex Primer. 2. First and Second Finish Coats: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. DFT 3.5 Mils min. Ben Moore: P29 DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss (self priming) Glidden: Devflex 4216HP High Performance WB Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Satin DTM Industrial Enamel S-W: B66 W200 DTM Acrylic Coating END OF SECTION PAINTING

188 SECTION SIGNAGE RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Dimensional characters. 2. Panel signs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 3. Provide floor plans showing locations of signs as approved by the Owner, corresponding to the Signage Schedule and Owner-approved Message Schedule. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter, number, and graphic element). Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment. 2. Panel Signs: Full-size Sample. 3. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. SIGNAGE

189 B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines published July 23, 2004 (ADAAG) and with ICC/ANSI A117.1, Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 26. b. Tactile Exit Signs. c. Room Capacity. d. Accessible Spaces. e. Directional Signs. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A. R. K. Ramos. 2. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 3. Charleston Industries, Inc. 4. Gemini Incorporated. 5. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. SIGNAGE

190 6. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 7. Mills Manufacturing Company. 8. Mohawk Sign Systems. C. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. D. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: Interior a. Character Size: Refer to drawings. b. Font: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. c. Location: Interior, wall mounted adjacent to entry. d. City of Richmond Logo, 2 toned flat panel 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acorn Sign Graphics. 2. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 3. APCO Graphics, Inc. 4. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 5. Best Sign Systems Inc. 6. Gemini Incorporated. 7. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 8. InPro Corporation 9. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 10. Mohawk Sign Systems. 11. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 12. Seton Identification Products. 13. Supersine Company (The) 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. SIGNAGE

191 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. SIGNAGE

192 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls, to the right of the right hand door for double active doors. Locate tactile signs to maintain a clear space beyond swing of door, centered on and in front of each sign, of 18 inches by 18 inches. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. 2. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.4 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. Message Schedule: The signage contractor shall meet with representatives of the Owner and develop a message schedule and individual sign layout and location for each sign required. Submit the message schedule to the Architect for review prior to fabrication. The Architect will provide the graphics contractor with reproducible floor plan drawings to illustrate sign locations. B. Base bids on the following quantities of interior panel signs and accessories. 1. Permanent Room Identification Panel Signs Quantity Restroom Signs with Pictograms Quantity 5 3. Evacuation Maps Quantity 2 4. Directional/Informational Panel Signs Quantity 5 END OF SECTION SIGNAGE

193 SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Aluminum wire for feeders and copper wire for branch circuits, insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B Stranded Conductors: ASTM B Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. GROUNDING AND BONDING

194 B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: GROUNDING AND BONDING

195 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kva and Less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kva: 3 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING

196 SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

197 a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

198 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slottedsupport system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2- inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

199 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. Concrete bases shall be 4 thickness/depth and and provided under all floor mounted electrical equipment. B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizingrepair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

200 END OF SECTION HANGARS AND SUPPORTS

201 SECTION RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Surface raceways. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Electri-Flex Company. 3. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 4. Southwire Company. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

202 6. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, as indicated, and sized according to NFPA Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

203 E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Panduit Corp. b. Wiremold / Legrand. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 10. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

204 F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. L. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC,. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Mechanical rooms. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

205 c. Gymnasiums. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

206 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from PVC to IMC before rising above floor. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. P. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

207 R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. T. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. RACEWAYS AND BOXES

208 2. Install backfill as specified in Section "Earthwork." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section "Earthwork." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND BOXES

209 SECTION SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

210 E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be inch. 2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.4 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

211 2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

212 3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. END OF SECTION SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

213 SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Equipment identification labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

214 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

215 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

216 SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. B. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system. C. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. D. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form. 1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

217 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist. B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals. B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable. B. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Software Developers: All subject to compliance with requirements. B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

218 C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kva) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kva ratings. 5. Panelboard designations. D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article. E. Short-Circuit Study Output: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. F. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction. G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout. 2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Comply with requirements in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis. B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis: 1. Location designation. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

219 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study. 3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399. B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551. C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer. D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings. E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows: 1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 ka or less. F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems and single line-to-ground faults. H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 3. Branch circuit panelboards. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

220 3.3 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study. B. Use the short-circuit study output and the field-verified settings of the overcurrent devices. C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size. 1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load. 2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions. D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts. E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except 240-V ac and 208-V ac systems fed from transformers less than 125 kva. F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm. G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles). H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location. I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call discrepancies to the attention of Architect. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

221 2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kva, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kva, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 8. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings. 9. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material. 10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 11. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 12. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and metallic shield performance parameters. 3.5 LABELING A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects and for each of the following locations: 1. Low-voltage switchboards. 3.6 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash Study Specialist. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

222 B. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the arc-flash warning labels. END OF SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

223 SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Switch-box occupancy sensors. 2. Indoor occupancy sensors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

224 2.2 SWITCH-BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Sensor Switch, Inc. B. Description: PIR type with integral power-switching contacts rated for 800 W at 120-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures, flourescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/6-hp motors; and rated for 1000 W at 277-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures, flourescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/3-hp motors, minimum. 2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Sensor Switch, Inc. B. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on and off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of at least 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving at least 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section " Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

225 PART 3 - EXECUTION RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4". B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section " Electrical Identification." B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays. B. Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

226 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. END OF SECTION LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

227 SECTION PANELBOARDS RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, PANELBOARDS

228 raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. PANELBOARDS

229 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus. E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. PANELBOARDS

230 B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. B. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. C. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. PANELBOARDS

231 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. D. Install filler plates in unused spaces. E. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. G. Comply with NECA IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section "Electrical Identification." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. PANELBOARDS

232 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS

233 SECTION WIRING DEVICES RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 3. Wall-switch occupancy sensors. 4. Cord and plug sets. 5. Floor service outlets and multioutlet assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. WIRING DEVICES

234 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper. b. Hubbell. c. Leviton. d. Pass & Seymour. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: WIRING DEVICES

235 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper. b. Hubbell. c. Pass & Seymour. d. Leviton. 2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: 1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. 3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Cooper. 2) Hubbell. 3) Leviton. 4) Pass & Seymour. 2.7 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. WIRING DEVICES

236 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.9 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening 2.10 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Wiremold/Legrand. B. Description: 1. Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness. 2. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. WIRING DEVICES

237 PART 3 - EXECUTION RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. WIRING DEVICES

238 F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section "Electrical Identification." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES

239 SECTION FUSES RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches and enclosed controllers. 2. Spare-fuse cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. FUSES

240 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. FUSES

241 D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s). 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION FUSES

242 SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GD: General duty. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. HD: Heavy duty. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

243 C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D/Group Schneider. B. Fusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

244 C. Nonfusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open. 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. Moeller Electric Corporation. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

245 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers. B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

246 SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. B. MCP: Motor circuit protector. C. N.C.: Normally closed. D. N.O.: Normally open. E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

247 1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red and Green pilot light. ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

248 C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type. 4. Surface mounting. 5. Red and Green pilot light. D. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. 4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA. 6. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting. 7. N.C. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button. E. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. c. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Fusible Disconnecting Means: ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

249 a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R indicated fuses. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type ACCESSORIES A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: Incandescent types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B. Two (2) sets N.C. N.O. auxiliary contact(s). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structuralsteel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

250 B. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller. C. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section "Fuses." D. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

251 SECTION LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Lighting Control" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

252 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS RICHMOND CITY HALL SUITE 110 RENOVATIONS A. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4. C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K. D. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. E. Internal driver. 2.2 DOWNLIGHT A. Retain this article for fixtures where the entire housing and mounting apparatus is installed flush with a ceiling. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Amerlux. 2. Columbia. 3. Cooper Lighting. 4. Lightolier; a Philips group brand. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. C. Universal mounting bracket. LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

253 D. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.3 RECESSED LINEAR A. Retain this article for a linear-style luminaire that is recessed and mounted with the aperture flush to the ceiling. Use this type for "troffer" or "panel"-type luminaires. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cerno Group. 2. Columbia. 3. Cooper Lighting. 4. Edge Lighting. 5. Focal Point LLC. 6. Lightolier; a Phillips group. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings. 2.4 SUSPENDED, LINEAR A. Retain this article for linear-style luminaires suspended from a structure used for general illumination. These fixtures may incorporate lenses, louvers, and multiple light distribution patterns for different applications, such as office lighting. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cerno Group. 2. Columbia. 3. Cooper Lighting. 4. Edge Lighting. 5. Focal Point LLC. 6. Lightolier; a Philips group brand. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. C. Minimum [1,500] [2,000] [3,000] <Insert number> lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of [85] <Insert number> lumens per watt. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

254 B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight. E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: Secured to outlet box. LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

255 F. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. G. Comply with requirements in Section "Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. H. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

256 SECTION PATHWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY AND AUDIO/VISUAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work covered under this section shall include furnishing and installing a complete pathway for Technology (voice and data cabling) and Audio Visual. A pathway shall consist of all conduit, sleeves, boxes troughs and pullboxes as indicated on the drawings. Pull wires shall be installed in all pathways. All wiring, devices including faceplates are furnished and installed by others. B. Pathways for Technology and Audio/Visual shall also include extending the incoming service conduits. The incoming service conduits shall consist of two (2) 4" conduits for the telephone service and the two (2) 4" conduits for the data service. Install a pullwire in each conduit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refer to related specification sections for materials including Section Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems, Section Raceways and Boxes. B. Refer to Technology and Audio Visual Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall install a complete pathway as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION PATHWAYS FOR TECHNOLOGY AND AUDIO VISUAL

257 June 19, 2018 City of Richmond, Special Capital Projects 900 East Broad St. Room 602 Richmond, Virginia ATTN: Mr. Anthony Jones Project Manager Re: Asbestos Abatement Specifications City Hall, Suite 110 Renovation Project 900 East Broad Street, Richmond, Virginia FEI Project Number: FEI-18AS289 Dear Mr. Jones: France Environmental, Inc. (FEI) has completed the Asbestos Abatement Specification for the Asbestos Abatement Project at the above referenced location scheduled to be renovated. Please find enclosed with this letter the Asbestos Abatement Specification Plan for the above referenced project. Should you have any questions regarding these specifications or need any additional help, please contact me at (804) Respectfully Submitted, FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. Derek D. Dambacher, REA Asbestos Abatement Project Designer Enclosures: Asbestos Abatement Specification Plan

258 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SPECIFICATION PLAN CITY HALL, SUITE 110 RENOVATION PROJECT 900 EAST BROAD STREET RICHMOND, VIRGINIA PREPARED FOR: CITY OF RICHMOND, SPECIAL CAPITAL PROJECTS 900 EAST BROAD ST. ROOM 602 RICHMOND, VIRGINIA PREPARED BY: FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC FOREST HILL AVE, SUITE 7 RICHMOND, VIRGINIA (804) (PHONE) (804) (FAX) DEREK D. DAMBACHER, REA VA ASBESTOS DESIGNER LICENSE # FEI PROJECT NO. FEI-18AS289 JUNE 19, 2018

259 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PLAN TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Part 1 - General 1.1 Summary of Work Description Submittal Requirements Terminology (Definitions) Codes and Regulations Asbestos Abatement Phasing Part 2 - Equipment and Materials 2.1 Personnel Protection Requirements Materials Tools and Equipment Part 3 - Execution of Abatement 3.1 Posting of the Project Work Area Preparation Work Areas - Work by Asbestos Abatement Contractor Decontamination Enclosure Systems Maintenance of Decontamination Enclosures Worker Protection - To Be Posted in Clean & Equipment Rooms Communications Fire Exits Security Location and Activation of Negative Air Pressure Equipment Removal Procedures Visual Inspections Asbestos Vinyl Floor Tile / Mastic Removal Asbestos Vinyl Floor Tile / Mastic Hole Drilling Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Material and Asbestos Contaminated Waste Gross Cleanup Post-Removal Encapsulation of Affected Areas Re-establishment of Objects and Systems SECTION ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING Part 1 - General 1.1 Testing/Air Monitoring Certification of Visual Inspection Appendix: Material Location Drawings

260 SECTION ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings, general provisions of the Contract and requirements specified in the Division 1 sections apply to this work. B. SCOPE OF WORK: Removals and relocations shall include all work required and inferred to be consistent with the drawings and as necessary to provide completed work starting with the conditions existing prior to commencing work. C. SPECIFICATION: This section of the specification covers the removal of asbestoscontaining building materials (ACBM). At all times an Asbestos Abatement Supervisor and Asbestos Project Monitor shall be on site and available while work is taking place. All abatement work shall be done in strict accordance with the specifications. The contractor shall not rely on the quantities presented in the Asbestos Survey Report. Instead, the contractor shall field verify all materials, quantities, locations, and field conditions prior to submitting their bid proposal. Compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local procedures, and methods for preparation, execution, cleanup, disposal, and safety are absolutely required. This compliance is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. SUMMARY OF WORK: The intent of the asbestos abatement project is to remove asbestoscontaining building materials (ACBM), prior to any renovation / demolition activities, that may impact with the renovation project. Asbestos containing floor tile and mastic will only be removed from areas under the High Density Storage System or walls if the materials become loose, delaminated or damaged during the demolition. If floor tile and mastics are to be removed due to delamination or damage, procedures in section 3.13 must be followed. Asbestos containing floor tile and mastic is present throughout the suite, during the installation of new walls over asbestos containing floor tile and mastic follow procedures outlines in section Building materials assumed or determined to be asbestos-containing by laboratory analysis include the following: a. Asbestos containing floor tile and associated mastic. Materials are located throughout the Suite 110. Approximate Quantity is 7,380 SF. Beige / Gray Floor Tile and Black Mastic Located under Carpet Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (2nd Layer) located in the Reception Area White Vinyl Floor Tile (2nd Layer) located in the Break Room E. Sequence of Work: The contractor shall follow the general sequence of events as described below. 1. Preparation of the work area (Including removal of carpet). 2. Removal of asbestos-containing materials. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

261 1.2 DESCRIPTION 3. Encapsulation of the work area. 4. Removal of the containment materials. 5. Disposal of the asbestos-containing materials. A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, insurance, and equipment in accordance with the most stringent requirements of EPA and OSHA and all other applicable regulatory agencies, to complete the removal of asbestos-containing materials as described in the Summary of Work. 1.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-work Submittal 1. NOTICES: Submit notices required by federal, state, and local regulations together with proof of timely transmittal to agency requiring the notice. 2. PERMITS: Submit copies of current valid permits required by state and local regulations, including arrangements for storage, transportation, and disposal of contaminated material. Dumpsite must conform EPA regulation 40 CFR LICENSES: Submit copies of all state and local licenses and permits necessary to carry out the work including but not limited to contractor license, supervisor licenses, and worker licenses. 4. CONTAINMENT AREAS: Show on Contract Drawings or an 8-1/2" x 11" plan of the containment areas (numbered sequentially), including the locations and quantity of negative air pressure equipment, the location of all decontamination chambers, entrances, and emergency exits from the work areas. 5. EQUIPMENT: Submit manufacturer's certification that vacuums, negative pressure equipment, respirators, and air supply equipment meet all requirements of OSHA and EPA. Include descriptions of any equipment to be employed not previously discussed. 6. WORKER TRAINING: The Contractor shall submit a list of the persons who will be employed by him and his subcontractors in the removal work. Present evidence that workers have received proper training required by regulations and the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR Distinguish between trained, full-time personnel and "pick-up" labor. 7. LOGS: Submit specimen copies of daily progress log and visitors' log. a. Visitor's Log: The Contractor shall maintain a visitors' log at the work place and require all persons visiting the site to sign the log. The log should provide space for the following information: 1) Name, organization represented, date, time, and purpose of visit. 2) Certificate of release signed and filed with Contractor that those who enter the work environment have been informed of the hazards of asbestos. b. Daily Log: The Contractor shall maintain a daily job log, which shall be maintained by the Project Superintendent. The log shall have daily entries describing the progress and location of the work, any special conditions encountered, records of testing, amount removed, names of workers entering and exiting the containment areas, and any other pertinent data. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

262 8. NOTICES TO SUPPLIERS: Copies of notices sent to suppliers of rental equipment and vehicles informing them of the nature of the use of their equipment. 9. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET: Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent for each material proposed for use on the work in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR ). Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment proposed for use with the material indicated and/or manufacturer's specification. B. CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS 1. Submit certification that rental vehicles and equipment have received clearance inspection by Project Superintendent prior to return to Rental Company. 2. Submit copies of the fully completed Waste Shipment Records (WSR) as documentation of compliance with NESHAP (d) (3) and (4). 3. Submit OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the work. 4. Submit copies of the daily progress log. 5. Submit copies of Visitors' Log. 1.4 TERMINOLOGY (Definitions) A. ABATEMENT: Procedure to control fiber release from asbestos-containing building materials. B. FOR THIS PROJECT: 1. Removal - All herein specified procedures necessary to remove asbestos-containing materials from an area and dispose of the materials at an acceptable site in an acceptable manner. 2. Post-Removal Surface Encapsulation - Procedures necessary to coat surfaces from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control any residual fiber release. 3. Abatement Activities - Any activity requiring respiratory protection as per this project manual, which disturbs or has the potential to disturb any asbestos-containing building material. This includes, but is not limited to, the following activities: precleaning, installing polyethylene, ACBM removal, encapsulation, and enclosure. C. ACBM OR ACM: Asbestos-containing building materials or asbestos-containing materials. D. AIR LOCK: A system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement from a contaminated area into an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of two (2) curtained doorways at least three (3) feet apart. E. AIR MONITORING: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air in a stated period of time. For this project, NIOSH Analytical Method 7400 shall be used. When "aggressive" air sampling is specified, blowers/fans are used to disperse settled fibers into the air during sampling. F. AMENDED WATER: Water to which a surfactant has been added to reduce water surface tension and thereby provide a more rapid penetration. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

263 G. AUTHORIZED VISITOR: The Building Owner, the Building Owner's representative, the Architect/Engineer's personnel, or a representative of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project. H. BARRIER: Any surface that inhibits air and fiber movement from the work area to non-work areas. Can be comprised of one or a combination of several materials, including but not limited to plywood, polyethylene sheeting, duct tape, and spray-poly. A critical barrier is one that seals any opening (such as doorways, vents, windows, penetrations) between the work area and non-work area. I. BUILDING OWNER: The Owner or his authorized representative. J. CURTAINED DOORWAY: Device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing three overlapping sheets of opaque 6-mil polyethylene over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway, and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. K. DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: A series of connected rooms, with air locks between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of workers and/or materials and equipment, constructed or moved onto site. L. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION UNIT: Decontamination enclosure system for materials and equipment, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area (washdown station), a washroom, a holding room, a container room, and an uncontaminated area. M. GROSS ABATEMENT AREA: An asbestos removal area that is sealed and fully contained in polyethylene. Workers enter the abatement area through a decontamination enclosure system. N. PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION UNIT: A decontamination enclosure system for workers, typically consisting of a designated area of the work area (gross contaminant removal station), an equipment room, an air lock, a shower, an air lock, and a clean room. 1. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room in the personnel decontamination enclosure system with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment. 2. AIR LOCK 3. Shower Room: A room between the two (2) air locks in the personnel decontamination enclosure system with hot and cold running water suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. 4. AIR LOCK 5. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the worker decontamination unit with provisions for storage of workers' street clothes and protective equipment. O. FIXED OBJECT: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area that cannot be removed from the work area without dismantling. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

264 P. HEPA FILTER: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length. Q. HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT: High efficiency particulate air filtered vacuuming equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers. Filters should be of 99.97% efficiency for retaining fibers greater than 0.3 microns in length. R. NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE EQUIPMENT: A local exhaust system, capable of maintaining constant, low velocity airflow through the Decontamination Unit and into the Work Area from adjacent uncontaminated areas and exhausting that air outside the building through HEPA filters. S. NIOSH: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. T. ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE: Owner's full-time representative responsible for air monitoring and site observation. Also referred to as Project Monitor. U. PLASTICIZING: Procedures necessary using polyethylene sheeting, adhesives, and/or taping to seal an area airtight. V. POST REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION: A liquid material which can be applied to surfaces from which asbestos-containing materials have been removed to control the possible release of residual asbestos fibers, either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components (penetrating encapsulant). W. SURFACTANT: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area. X. WET CLEANING/WIPING: The process of eliminating contamination from building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as asbestoscontaminated waste. 1.5 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS: Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into the contract documents, or as if published copies are bound herewith. B. FEDERAL REGULATIONS: Those which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials include but are not limited to the following: 1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA), including but not limited to: a. Asbestos Regulations - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1001 of the Code of Federal Regulations CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

265 b. Respiratory Protection - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal Regulations c. Construction Industry - Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1101 of the Code of Federal Regulations d. Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 20 of the Code of Federal Regulations e. Hazard Communication - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1200 of the Code of Federal Regulations f. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags - Title 29, Part 1910, Section 145 of the Code of Federal Regulations 2. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) including but not limited to: Worker Protection Rule 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart G CPTS 62044, FLR Federal Register, Vol. 50, No. 134, 7/12/85 P a. Regulation for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart A of the Code of Federal Regulations b. National Emission Standard for Asbestos - Title 40, Part 61, Subpart M of the Code of Federal Regulations including Asbestos NESHAP Revision; Final Rule, Federal Register; Tuesday, November 20, c. Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) - 40 CFR Part US Department of Transportation (DOT) including but not limited to: a. Hazardous Substances: Final Rule - Regulation 49 CFR, Parts 171 and 172 C. STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS: Abide by all state and local regulations which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials, including but not limited to: 1. Virginia Department of Labor and Industry a. Licensed Asbestos Contractor Notification, Asbestos Project Permits, and Permit Fees Regulations VR Virginia Department of Environmental Quality a. Solid Waste Regulations VR D. STANDARDS: Those which discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are not limited to the following: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Publication Z CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

266 b. Practices for Respiratory Protection, Publication Z E. EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS: Those that discuss asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials are listed below only for the Contractor's information. These documents do not describe the work and are not a part of the work of this contract. 1. Guidance for Controlling Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA560/ Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PHASING A. Asbestos abatement work shall be scheduled and coordinated with the City of Richmond, General Contractor (if applicable), and Project Monitor. It is the abatement contractor s responsibility to coordinate the abatement schedule (in advance) with the Owner s Project Monitoring firm. PART 2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.1 PERSONNEL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to commencement of work, the workers shall be instructed and shall be knowledgeable on the hazards of asbestos exposure, use and fitting of respirators, protective clothing, decontamination procedures, and all aspects of asbestos work procedures; workers shall have medical examinations. B. The Contractor acknowledges that he alone is responsible for enforcing personnel protection requirements and that these specifications provide only a minimum acceptable standard for each phase of operation. C. Provide workers with personally issued and marked respiratory equipment approved by NIOSH and accepted by OSHA. D. Where not in violation of NIOSH and OSHA requirements, the contractor shall provide, as a minimum, the following respirator protection for each phase of operation: 1. Precleaning/Wet Wiping of Area: No respiratory protection needed. 2. Plastic Installation: No respiratory protection needed. 3. Asbestos Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges. If mastic solvents are to be utilized on site, appropriate respiratory protection is required in accordance with the manufactures recommendation. 4. Plastic Removal: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges. 5. Loading Waste Material on Truck (outside work area): MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges. 6. Unloading Bags at Landfill: MSHA/NIOSH half-face dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges. E. The above schedule is the minimum respiratory protection acceptable. Should any condition, for any reason, be encountered where the exposure level, after application of the appropriate CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

267 protection factor of the respiratory equipment in use, exceeds 0.01 f/cc, substitute respiratory equipment with protection factors that reduce worker exposure levels below 0.01 f/cc. F. No visitors shall be allowed in work areas, except as authorized by the Owner or Owner s Representative. G. Provide workers with sufficient sets of disposable protective full-body clothing. Such clothing shall consist of full-body coveralls, footwear, and headgear as manufactured by Kimberly Clark "Kleenguard", one-piece coveralls or equal. Provide eye protection and hard hats as required by applicable safety regulations. Reusable type protective clothing and footwear intended for reuse shall be left in the Contaminated Equipment Room until the end of the asbestos abatement work at which time shall be disposed of as asbestos waste. Disposable clothing shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be disposed of as contaminated waste. H. Provide authorized visitors and the Project Monitor with suitable protective clothing, headgear, footwear, and gloves as described above whenever they enter the work area. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name. 1. Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces, and under cover sufficient to prevent damage or contamination. 2. Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the premises. Material that becomes contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations. B. PLASTIC SHEETING: Flame retardant polyethylene sheeting shall be used where applicable to comply with fire code requirements. C. TAPE: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for attachment of polyethylene sheets to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water, duct tape, poly prep tapes or approved equal. D. ADHESIVES: Capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of polyethylene and for attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended water. A. CAULKS: Not Applicable. B. SURFACTANT: Shall consist of 50% polyoxyethylene ether and 50% of polyoxyethylene ester, or equivalent, and shall be mixed with water to provide a concentration of one ounce of surfactant to 5 gallons of water. Use "Aqua-Gro" by Aquatrols Corp. of America, Pennsauken, New Jersey, or approved equal. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that this surfactant is compatible with the materials to be removed and their substrates. If found to be incompatible, the Contractor shall supply suitable wetting agents at no extra cost to the Owner. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

268 C. IMPERMEABLE CONTAINERS: Suitable to receive and retain any asbestos-containing or contaminated materials until disposal at an approved site. The containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR and NESHAP Regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Containers must be both air and watertight and must be resistant to damage and rupture. D. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS: As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR E. GLOVE BAGS: Safe-T-Strip as manufactured by Asbeguard Equipment, Inc., 130 Esna Park Drive, Markham, Ontario, Canada, L3R 1E3, Profo-Bag as manufactured by Asbestos Control Technology, Inc., P. O. Box 183, 38 North Pine Avenue, Maple Shade, New Jersey, 08052, or approved equal. F. ENCAPSULANTS: American coatings Corporation, Cable Coating 22P, penetrating encapsulant; Better Working Environments, Inc., removal encapsulant; and Cable Coating 2B, bridging encapsulant, as applicable, or approved equal. G. MASTIC REMOVER: Shall be commercially available product formulated for the removal of mastics, shall have closed cup flashpoint of 140 degrees F. or higher, (NFPA Class III), shall contain no chlorinated compounds, and shall contain no compounds which could render the waste as hazardous waste for disposal. Products which meet these requirements include, but are not limited to De-Solv-It, and ADL-1 by Orange-Sol; Foster by H.B. Fuller Company; Sentinel 7200 Mastic Remover by Sentinel Chemical Company; Certane 77 by Certified Technologies Corporation; and Orange Stuff by I. Scheid, Inc. H. OTHER MATERIALS: Provide all other materials, such as, but not limited to lumber, plywood, nails, and hardware, which may be required to properly prepare and complete this project. 2.3 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide suitable tools for asbestos removal. 1. Water Sprayer: Airless or a low-pressure sprayer for amended water application as applicable. 2. Air-Purifying Equipment: High Efficiency Particulate Air Filtration Systems (HEPA) shall comply with ANSI Z No air movement system or air equipment should discharge asbestos fibers outside the work area. Thus, the negative air unit shall be equipped with a three-filter bank with the last being the HEPA filter capable of removing 99.97% of fibers >0.3 u (microns). 3. Paint/Encapsulant Sprayer: Airless. 4. Scaffolding: As required to accomplish the specified work and meet all applicable safety regulations. 5. Vacuums: Use HEPA type such as Nilfisk GA 73 or approved equal. 6. Other tools and equipment as necessary. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

269 PART 3 EXECUTION OF ABATEMENT 3.1 POSTING OF THE PROJECT A. Post caution signs in and around the work area to comply with OSHA regulation 29 CFR and in compliance with all other Federal, State, and local requirements. B. As required by OSHA regulations 29 CFR , warning shall bear the following information: DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA C. Remove signs upon completion of abatement. 3.2 WORK AREA PREPARATION A. A minimum of 48-hours prior to mobilization, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall notify the Owner s Project Monitoring Firm of the abatement schedule and request the Project Monitor to be onsite. No work shall take place without the Project Monitor present or the Project Monitor s acknowledgement of the work taking place and he/she has provided the abatement contractor authorization to commence work without the Project Monitor present. Asbestos abatement work that takes place without the Project Monitor s knowledge or not providing advanced notice to the Project Monitoring Firm may be considered a breach of contract between the Owner and General Contractor and/or Asbestos Abatement Contractor. B. If required, the Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to shut down electric power to work areas. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor may use existing electrical service to the building for temporary electrical power during abatement work. C. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to shut down or isolate heating, cooling, and ventilating air systems to the work areas. D. Before the work is begun, and unless otherwise specified, the Owner shall remove from work areas, all removable items and equipment from the work area. The Owner shall later replace furniture and movable objects only after the Project Monitor specifies the area is safe for reoccupancy. 3.3 WORK AREAS - WORK BY ASBESTOS ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR A. Preclean fixed objects within the work area, first using HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Completely enclose fixed objects with minimum 6-mil thick plastic sheeting sealed with tape. Mechanical equipment which is still operable and CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

270 used to run the daily operations of the building systems shall not be included in the work area. This equipment shall be properly vented in accordance with the manufacture s specifications. B. Prior to commencing abatement work, shut down and isolate heating, cooling, and ventilating air systems to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to other areas of the building. Seal any vents within the work area with tape and two layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting. C. Clean work areas where debris or visible dust is present and in areas where floor materials are not being removed. Clean the work area first using HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not use HEPA vacuum equipment on wet surfaces unless units are specially constructed for wet/dry use. Do not use amended water on gypsum board or other material that would be damaged by the wetting agent. HEPA vacuum or damp sponge with regular water would be appropriate. D. Seal off all openings, including but not limited to windows, corridors, doorways, skylights, ducts, grills, diffusers, and any other penetrations of the work areas, with two layers of 6-mil plastic sheeting sealed with tape (Critical Barriers). E. Prepare areas undergoing abatement in accordance with the following requirements. Areas undergoing multiple removal operations shall be prepared in accordance with the most stringent requirements as follows: 1. Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic: The negative pressure work area shall consist, at a minimum, of critical barriers over windows, doors, and openings (i.e. HVAC diffusers, returns, exhaust fans, etc.). A two-stage decontamination unit with a wash station may be used in place of a three-stage decontamination unit with a shower provided the floor tile and mastic is removed in a manner that is not deemed friable. Splash Guards shall be installed on the walls and columns, which are not scheduled for demolition, and extend a minimum of four-feet (4 ) in height from the floor. The critical barriers and splashguards shall consist of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting. Vinyl floor tile and mastic shall be removed in accordance with Section 13280, Paragraph If the floor tile is removed in a manner where it would be deemed friable (as determined by the Project Monitor), then a Decontamination Enclosure System is required in accordance with Section 13280, Paragraph 3.4. If a mastic removal solvent is used it must be used in accordance with the manufacture s recommendations. The solvent shall be thoroughly cleaned off the floor after the mastic is removed so the new adhesive will work properly during the reinstallation of the new flooring. This can be done by mopping the floor with an appropriate cleaning solution. F. Maintain and mark emergency exits from the work areas or establish alternate exits satisfactory to the local fire marshal. 3.4 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS A. GENERAL: The Contractor shall use portable decontamination units acceptable to EPA and OSHA, connected to the work area with framed-in or accordion tunnels, if necessary, and line CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

271 the tunnels with plastic, sealed with tape at all joints in the plastic, or shall construct decontamination units on-site. B. ACCESS: In all cases, access to contained areas shall be through an air lock. In all cases, access between any two rooms within the decontamination enclosure system shall be through an air lock. C. WORKER DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Construct a worker decontamination enclosure system contiguous to the work area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers as follows: 1. An equipment room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the work area and one to the shower room, via an air lock. 2. A shower room with two (2) curtained doorways, one to the equipment room and one to the clean room, via air locks. The shower room shall contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water with individual shut-off valves inside the showers. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to insure against leakage of any kind. Ensure a supply of soap at all times in the shower room. Drainage from showers shall be disposed of as contaminated water or filtered as specified below. 3. Waste water containing asbestos, including drainage from decontamination showers, shall be either disposed of as contaminated waste or filtered in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements prior to introduction into the sanitary sewer system. 4. A clean room with one curtained doorway into the shower (via an air lock) and one entrance or exit to noncontaminated areas of the building. The clean room shall have sufficient space for storage of the workers' street clothes, towels, and other noncontaminated items. D. EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEM: Provide or construct an equipment decontamination enclosure system consisting of two totally enclosed chambers as follows: 1. A washroom, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to a designated area of the work area and a curtained doorway to the holding area. 2. A holding area, constituting an air lock, with a curtained doorway to the washroom and a curtained doorway to the uncontaminated area. 3. Contractor may elect to construct equipment decon unit on side of equipment room of worker decontamination unit. 3.5 MAINTENANCE OF DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURES A. At the beginning of each work shift and throughout removal, all seals and curtained doorways shall be inspected, and if not found in proper condition, repaired immediately. B. Respiratory equipment shall be cleaned, repaired, and sanitized after each use. C. Soap and shampoo shall be in the showers at all times. D. Fresh towels shall be available at all times. E. All areas shall be kept clean and in order. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

272 F. Provide a disposal bag for contaminated filters in the shower room. G. Provide storage for wet and dry towels. H. Ensure that the drainage filtering systems are kept clean and operable at all times. I. At the end of each decontamination period, the shower, air locks, and clean room shall be cleaned and dried. J. At the end of each work shift: the two air locks and the shower shall be thoroughly disinfected; the filter bag (if applicable) shall be returned to the equipment room for disposal; the equipment room and first air lock shall be thoroughly HEPA vacuumed and wet cleaned. 3.6 WORKER PROTECTION - TO BE POSTED IN CLEAN AND EQUIPMENT ROOMS A. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to enter the work area, shall: 1. Remove all clothing, unless it is to remain in the equipment room for eventual disposal. 2. Don protective clothing (coveralls, gloves, boots, etc.). 3. Don the appropriate respiratory protection, following all training procedures and manufacturer's instructions. Hood shall be worn over respirator straps. B. All workers and authorized personnel, in order to leave the work area, shall: 1. Remove gross (visible) contamination from themselves and their equipment. 2. Enter the equipment room and, keeping respirator in place, remove all protective clothing, including gloves and boots. Place contaminated clothing in the bag(s) provided. Store gloves and/or boots in their respective areas. 3. Still wearing the respirator, proceed to the first air lock. Once inside, ensure all curtained doorways behind are properly closed. 4. Respirator still in place, move into the shower room and rinse off thoroughly. If wearing dual cartridge respirators, make sure the cartridges are completely soaked before removing the respirator and disposing of cartridges in the container provided. Pass respirators into the second air lock (between shower and the clean room). 5. Complete showering, thoroughly soaping, and shampooing. 6. Proceed to the clean room, dry off, dress, and return respirator to the storage area. 7. No smoking, eating, or drinking shall be allowed inside decontamination enclosures. 3.7 COMMUNICATIONS A. Provide an electronic communications system suitable for inside or outside, and inter-room communications, in order to monitor all activities within the work area and to readily transfer messages from one location to another. B. If readily achievable, a viewing window shall be installed to facilitate observation of the work area. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

273 3.8 FIRE EXITS A. Designate and maintain emergency and fire exits from the work area in accordance with local codes and regulations. All exits shall be clearly marked with fluorescent tape or red enamel and shall be clearly visible from any part of the work area. 3.9 SECURITY A. Make all necessary provisions for 24-hour building security for areas designated for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining security of the abatement areas throughout the contract period LOCATION AND ACTIVATION OF NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE A. Maintain negative pressure system in the work areas during all asbestos abatement work for which gross abatement techniques are specified or required. B. Comply with Paragraph J.2 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos- Containing Materials in Buildings, June C. Provide one spare exhaust unit per three units at all times. Spare exhaust units shall be of the same size and capacity as the largest operating units. D. Suspend electrical cords off the floor and out of workers' way to protect the cords from damage from traffic, sharp objects, and pinching. Do not fasten cords with staples, and do not hang cords from nails or suspend with wire. E. Provide number of exhaust units in each work area to provide one air change every 15 minutes in all locations of the work areas. F. Locate units so that make-up air enters the work area primarily through the decontamination facility and traverses the work area as much as possible. Use Section J.3 of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June It is recommended units be relocated, within the work area, during the removal process to ensure proper air changes within the immediate work area. G. Provide additional make-up air openings as shall be necessary to effectively move air through the work area and to avoid creating too high a pressure differential that would damage or cause "blown-in" of temporary barriers and plastic coverings. Provide inlets by making openings in the plastic sheeting near the ceiling and as far as possible from the exhaust units. Provide self-closing polyethylene flaps over the openings to prevent backflow of air from the contained area to the outside. H. Provide minimum number of auxiliary make-up air openings to maintain negative pressure. A negative pressure in excess of 0.02 inches of water differential shall be maintained. I. Vent all exhaust units to the outside of the building. Provide flexible or rigid duct as necessary to provide exterior venting and proper location of exhaust units. Ducts shall be completely sealed, in good repair, and protected from possible damage within the work area. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

274 J. After the work area has been prepared, the decontamination facility set up, and the exhaust units installed, start the units (one at a time if more than one is provided). Visually check the direction of air movement through the openings in the barriers and verify movement of air in all locations of the work areas by use of ventilation smoke tubes. Adjust the location of exhaust units or provide additional exhaust units for the work area if the test indicates inadequate or improper air movement. K. After removal has begun, maintain operation of exhaust units continuously to maintain a constant negative pressure until decontamination of the work area is complete. Do not turn units off at the end of the work shift or when removal operations temporarily stop. L. Change filters in exhaust units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Paragraph J of the EPA document, Guidance for Controlling Friable Asbestos- Containing Materials in Buildings, "Purple Book", June 1985 or when there is obvious loss of negative pressure. M. When a final inspection and the results of the final air monitoring tests indicate an acceptable level of airborne fibers, remove and dispose of prefilters and shut off the exhaust units. If the exhaust units are to be used in another work area, leave the final filter in place and seal all intake openings to the unit to prevent contamination due to asbestos fibers collected on the final filter. If the exhaust units are not to be used in other work areas, remove the final filter and dispose of as contaminated waste. N. If dismantling operations result in visible dust on surfaces, replace filters, restart exhaust units, reclean surfaces and perform additional area air monitoring (at Contractor's expense) until the level of airborne fibers is acceptable as specified. O. Dispose of all filters as asbestos-contaminated waste material as specified EQUIPMENT REMOVAL PROCEDURES A. Clean external and internal surfaces of all nonfixed equipment and/or objects by thoroughly wet wiping and/or rinsing, before moving such items into the Equipment Decontamination Unit for final cleaning and removal to uncontaminated areas. B. Objects and equipment removed shall be stored in areas designated by the Owner VISUAL INSPECTIONS A. Upon completion of each phase of work area activities and four hours before the next phase work activities are to begin, notify the Project Monitor that the work area is ready for inspection. B. The Contractor shall not begin the next work activities until the Project Monitor has inspected the area and any deficiencies have been corrected. C. The Project Monitor with the Contractor present will perform the following minimum schedule of inspections. 1. Prior to the initiation of any site activities (document condition of existing site). CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

275 2. After area pre-cleaning and prior to preparation of work area with plastic sheeting. 3. After work area preparation with plastic sheeting and prior to start of abatement. 4. After fine cleaning and before encapsulation. 5. After Final Clearance and all barriers are removed ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE / MASTIC REMOVAL A. The building owner shall remove all appliances and furniture from the working area prior to the removal of asbestos floor tile. B. Prepare the area in accordance with Section Paragraph 3.3. C. Remove non-asbestos binding strips or other restrictive molding from doorways, walls, etc. clean and dispose of as non-asbestos waste. D. Floor tile shall be removed in whole pieces utilizing the Armstrong Method. The contractor shall use amended water to wet the tiles during removal. A heat gun shall be used to heat the tiles, softening the mastic, allowing for the removal of tiles in whole pieces. E. The adhesive shall be removed by scraping under wet conditions. The adhesive shall be removed such that, when completed, there are no remaining ridges or undulations of adhesive and no further preparation is required for the floor to be retiled. If using a commercial mastic remover (Reference Section 13280, Paragraph 2.2. of this section) use MSHA/NIOSH halfface dual cartridge respirators equipped with HEPA cartridges and any "piggy back" cartridges specified by the MSDS. If using a mastic remover, special care shall be taken so as not to get the mastic remover on or under remaining tiles. F. All refuse shall be disposed of as asbestos-containing waste in accordance with Section Paragraph 3.18, Disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste. G. Ensure all disposal container are properly labeled in conformance with 29 CFR and 40 CFR 61. Refer to Section Paragraph Codes and Regulations of this section HOLE DRILLING THROUGH ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE / MASTIC A. The contractor shall only use workers with a minimum of 16 hours of asbestos awareness training during this work. B. The Contractor shall preclean fixed objects within the work area, first using HEPA vacuum equipment and then wet cleaning methods as appropriate. C. Prior to commencing abatement work, coordinate the shut down and isolate heating, cooling, and ventilating air systems to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to other areas of the building. Seal any vents within the work area with tape and 6-mil fire retardant polyethylene sheeting. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

276 D. The Contractor shall use a drill with a HEPA vacuum attachment or perform the drilling inside a negative pressure glove-bag sealed to the floor. The location of the holes will be determined and marked by the General Contractor. E. The Contractor must establish a regulated area properly demarcated with Asbestos Warning Signs as required by 29 CFR (e). F. Following completion of the drilling operations, wet wipe and HEPA vacuum surrounding floor areas. All surfaces in the work area shall be cleaned. G. The work area shall be inspected by the Supervisor and Project Monitor to ensure all dust and debris has been removed. H. Each hole location shall be sprayed with an encapsulant. I. Any debris generated shall be placed in Asbestos Waste Bags, sealed and placed in a second 6-mil asbestos waste bag. All asbestos waste bags shall be sealed and have generator labels on them prior to leaving the work area. J. All asbestos waste shall be transported out of the building and disposed of properly DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL AND ASBESTOS CONTAMINATED WASTE A. As the work progresses, and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on site, workers from uncontaminated areas in full protective clothing and dual cartridge respirators shall enter the equipment decontamination unit and place the appropriate supply of specified containers within the container room. Workers in the holding room shall be passed empty containers for receiving bagged material. Full sealed containers from the holding room shall be passed back into the container room for storage. Ensure all curtained doorways are closed. Ensure that all containers are sealed properly before removing for transport and disposal. At no time shall a removal worker pass the curtained doorway between the holding room and the container room. Drums will not be required if Contractor uses sealed bins or enclosed trucks to store and transport double-bagged waste. Approval must be obtained from the Asbestos Designer prior to employment of this method. 1. LABEL REQUIREMENTS: Provide labels affixed to all asbestos waste containers: a. Warning labels as required by OSHA regulation 40 CFR as follows: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD b. Informational labels as required by NESHAP regulation 40 CFR 61, Subpart M with the name of the waste generator and the location at which the waste was CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

277 generated. If handwritten, use, at a minimum, indelible ink to legibly record the required information. B. Vehicles used for transporting asbestos-containing materials to disposal sites shall have a completely enclosed, lockable storage compartment if drum requirement is to be deleted. Storage compartments shall be plasticized and sealed with a minimum of one (1) layer of 6- mil polyethylene on the sides and top and two (2) layers of 6-mil polyethylene on the floor. The compartments shall be thoroughly wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed following the disposal of each load of material at the dumpsite. At the conclusion of the project (or before transport vehicles are used for other purposes), the polyethylene shall be properly removed and disposed of as contaminated waste. After this is accomplished, compartments shall once again be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed in order to eliminate all debris prior to reuse of the vehicles. Rented vehicles shall receive clearance inspection prior to being returned to the rental company. All plastic sheeting, tape, cleaning material, including mops and sponges, clothing, filters, and all other contaminated disposable materials shall be packaged, labeled, and disposed of as asbestos-containing waste. 1. TRANSPORT SIGN REQUIREMENTS: Provide signs during waste transport and disposal as follows: a. As required by the US Department of Transportation, 49 CFR 171 and 172, warning signs shall display the following: RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SOLID, NOS ORM-E, NA 9188 (ASBESTOS) b. As required by NESHAPS, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, mark vehicle used to transport asbestos-containing waste material during the loading and unloading of the waste so that the signs are visible as follows: DANGER ASBESTOS DUST HAZARDS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY C. Dispose of materials at an authorized disposal site in accordance with the requirements of federal, state, and local disposal authorities. D. Workers unloading waste material at the disposal site shall be dressed in full-body protective clothing and half-face negative pressure dual cartridge respirators. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

278 3.16 GROSS CLEANUP A. Remove all visible accumulations of asbestos-containing materials and debris by HEPA vacuums, sponging, etc. Wet clean all surfaces within the work area. B. The entire work area shall be totally, visibly clean. The Contractor shall notify the Owner s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor of the time the work area will be subject for visual inspection. This inspection shall be certified by the Contractor and will be verified by the representative using the "Certification of Visual Inspection" found in the Testing Section POST-REMOVAL ENCAPSULATION OF AFFECTED AREAS A. The work area shall have passed visual inspection prior to post-removal encapsulation. B. An approved encapsulant shall be applied, using airless spraying equipment, to all areas of the project where asbestos-containing materials have been removed. Encapsulant shall be colored for ready visibility. C. ENCAPSULANTS 1. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the replacement material as per manufacturer advice and approval by Architect/Engineer. 2. If any encapsulant is incompatible with the substrate, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for providing an alternate encapsulant that is compatible, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Upon completion of encapsulation of surfaces from which asbestos has been removed, the Contractor shall inform the on-site representative that the area is ready for compliance monitoring RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF OBJECTS AND SYSTEMS A. Fixtures, equipment, or objects relocated by the contractor to storage areas designated by the Owner shall be reestablished under this contract as to their exact position and material shape. Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage to objects on premises. END OF SECTION CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) 6/19/2018 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

279 SECTION ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 TESTING/AIR MONITORING A. Throughout the entire removal and cleaning operations, air monitoring will be conducted by an accredited Project Monitor to ensure Contractor compliance with EPA and OSHA regulations, excluding personnel samples required by OSHA, and any additional applicable state and local government regulations. Air monitoring results gathered by the Owner s laboratory will not be used by the Contractor to verify OSHA compliance. Air monitoring for OSHA compliance by the Contractor shall be conducted according to the method prescribed by 29 CFR , Appendix A or applicable state or local regulations. B. Air monitoring shall be conducted by a Project Monitor licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation pursuant to the requirements of Title 54.1, Chapter 5 of the Code of Virginia. C. Air monitoring will be performed by an independent firm. Selection of and payment to the Project Monitoring Firm will be made by the Owner. D. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for providing personal monitoring of his employees as per OSHA E. Monitoring Prior to Actual Removal: The Project Monitor will provide area monitoring and establish the reference baseline ambient fiber concentrations 24 hours prior to the masking and sealing operations for each removal site. A minimum of three (3) area baseline samples shall be taken, two (2) inside the work area and one (1) outside the work area. A volume of air sufficient to obtain a limit of quantification of 0.01 fibers/cc shall be secured. Field blanks shall be secured in accordance with the latest revision of the NIOSH 7400 Method. F. Monitoring During Asbestos Removal: The Project Monitor will provide environmental and work area monitoring, for the Owner, during exposure to airborne concentrations of asbestos. This monitoring will be performed daily at the Project Monitor s discretion: 1. If monitoring outside the asbestos control area shows airborne concentrations exceeding the reference baseline ambient fiber concentration and is due to the abatement contractor s work practices or breach in the containment, the Contractor shall stop all work, notify the Owner immediately, identify and correct the condition(s) causing the increase. G. Monitoring Results During Asbestos Abatement: PCM fiber counting shall be completed and results reviewed by the Project Monitor on a daily basis when conducting air sampling. The Project Monitor shall notify the Contractor and the Owner immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers greater than or equal to 0.01 fibers/cc. 1. The services of a testing laboratory will be employed by the Owner to perform laboratory analysis of the air samples. A microscope and technician will be set up at the job site, or samples will be sent daily to a laboratory, so that written reports on air samples can be obtained within 24 hours of conducting sampling. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING 6/19/18

280 H. Final Compliance Monitoring: Analysis of samples taken after final cleanup shall be by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). The Owner s environmental health testing laboratory will conduct area clearance monitoring. Sampling shall start after the following: 1. HEPA vacuuming and wet cleaning of all surfaces of the work area must have been conducted. 2. All visible accumulations of asbestos-containing waste material must have been removed from the work area, as determined by the Owner s Certified Industrial Hygienist/Project Monitor. 3. First polyethylene layer must have been removed from walls and floors. 4. Completion of a satisfactory visual inspection by the Project Monitor. 5. The area completely covered by a spray encapsulant. 6. All surfaces within the regulated area shall be completely dry, spray applied encapsulant shall be completely dry. I. Clearance Criteria: All samples will have a concentration of airborne fibers at or below 0.01 fibers/cc by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If the final clearance samples do not meet the minimum clearance requirements, re-cleaning and re-sampling must be accomplished. The Removal Contractor shall pay for the additional cost of re-sampling and re-analysis. The method of sampling and analysis will be the same as that used for the first set of samples. J. Glove Bag Operations: Not Used 1.2 CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION A. The following Certification of Visual Inspection shall be completed by the Contractor and Project Monitor following completion of removal work, cleanup, and his/her visual inspection of the work area. The Certification of Visual Inspection shall be provided to the Owner upon completion of the job. CITY HALL SUITE RENOVATION (FEI-18AS289) ASBESTOS AIR MONITORING/TESTING 6/19/18

281 CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION AND FINAL AIR CLEARANCE Project / Building: Project Number: Specific Area: ASBESTOS ABATEMENT SUPERVISOR CERTIFICATION The Contractor hereby certifies that he/she has visually inspected the work area (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls, ceiling and floor, decontamination unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no dust, debris, or residue. By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: Company Name: ASBESTOS PROJECT MONITOR S CERTIFICATION The Asbestos Project Monitor hereby certifies that he/she has accompanied the Contractor on his visual inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his knowledge and belief, the Contractor's certification above is a true and honest one. By: (Signature) Date: (Print Name) Title: Company Name: France Environmental, Inc. ASBESTOS FINAL AIR CLEARANCE SAMPLING Final Air Clearance Samples Were Not Required (Visual Inspection Only) The final air samples have been completed and the sample results are in accordance with the Contract Documents. The final air samples were analyzed by: PCM or TEM (circle one). Clearance air sample numbers are: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clearance Criteria of (<0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Passed the Clearance Criteria of (<70 structures/mm 2 ) by TEM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clearance Criteria of (>0.01 f/cc) by PCM Analysis: Final Air Clearance Failed the Clear. Criteria of (>70 structures/mm 2 ) by TEM Analysis:. END OF SECTION 13281

282 MATERIAL LOCATION DRAWINGS

283 2 1 Asbestos General Notes: Asbestos Specific Notes: 1. Locations of Asbestos-Containing Materials (ACM) are approximate. Contractor shall field verify all locations and quantities of ACM materials. 2. Asbestos-Containing Floor Tile is not scheduled to be removed as a part of this renovation project. Tiles will only be removed if they start coming up during demolition. 1 2 Approximate Location of High Density File Storage System To Be Removed. If ACM Floor Tile Needs to Be Removed During Demolition, Follow The Asbestos Abatement Specifications. New Walls To Be Installed On Top Of ACM Floor Tile / Mastic. Follow Procedures Outlined In Asbestos Abatement Specifications. Asbestos-Containing Materials Location Drawing City of Richmond, City Hall, First Floor, Suite East Broad Street, Richmond, VA FEI Project: FEI-18AS289 6/19/2018

284 June 19, 2018 City of Richmond, Special Capital Projects 900 East Broad St. Room 602 Richmond, Virginia ATTN: Mr. Anthony Jones Project Manager Re: Asbestos Bulk Sampling Survey Results City Hall, Suite 110 Renovation Project 900 East Broad Street, Richmond, Virginia FEI Project Number: FEI-18AS289 Dear Mr. Jones: France Environmental, Inc. (FEI) has completed the asbestos sampling of suspect materials in conjunction with the planned renovation project. FEI s scope of work included verifying the materials identified during a previous survey conducted in 2009 and to sample and document any building materials not previously sampled. Mr. Kevin M. Pittman and Mr. Michael D. Allshouse (Virginia Asbestos Inspector License Numbers and respectively) conducted the fieldwork on June 6, Asbestos Sampling: FEI did not identify any materials not previously sampled and was able to verify the existence of these materials. FEI was also able to verify that the asbestos containing floor tile exists throughout the entire suite including underneath the rolling file storage system in the southern portion of the room. FEI did not submit any additional samples to the lab for analysis. FEI did not identify any drywall/joint compound or plaster to sample in the proposed renovation areas. A material is considered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the Commonwealth of Virginia to be an asbestos-containing material (ACM) if at least one (1) sample collected from a multi-sample group contains asbestos in an amount greater than one percent (>1%). The results of the samples collected are as follows: Beige / Gray Floor Tile and Black Mastic Located under Carpet Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (2nd Layer) located in the Reception Area White Vinyl Floor Tile (2nd Layer) located in the Break Room

285 City of Richmond City Hall, Suite 110 Asbestos Bulk Sampling Survey Results Page 2 FEI Project Number: FEI-18AS289 6/19/18 Copies of the laboratory report; sample location drawing; site photographs and the inspector s license have been attached to this report. Should you have any questions or require additional information, please contact us at (804) Respectfully Submitted, FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. Kevin M. Pittman Asbestos Inspector Micheal D. Allshouse Lead Inspector Derek D. Dambacher, REA Senior Project Manager Attachments: 2009 Survey Report Inspector s License

286 2009 SURVEY REPORT

287 November 6, 2009 City of Richmond General Services 900 East Broad Street Suite G-7 Richmond, Virginia ATTN.: Mr. W. Robert Irby Capital Projects Manager Re: Asbestos Bulk Sampling Survey Results City Hall, Suite 110 Renovation Project 900 East Broad Street Richmond, Virginia FEI Project Number: FEI-9AS331 Dear Mr. Irby: France Environmental, Inc., (FEI) has completed the limited asbestos bulk sampling of building materials associated with the scheduled renovation project in suite 110 of City Hall. FEI s scope of work was limited to sampling building materials that may be impacted during the floor remodeling of Suite 110. The suite has a raised floor; carpeting and multiple layers of vinyl floor tile throughout the suite. FEI s scope of work was limited and did not encompass a comprehensive asbestos inspection of the entire building or the entire suite. The Capital Projects Manager directed FEI s inspector to the areas of concern and materials that required sampling. FEI inspector, Mr. Kevin M. Pittman (Virginia Asbestos Inspector License Number ) conducted the fieldwork on October 23, FEI collected sixteen (16) bulk samples of various materials, which may be impacted during the renovation project. Descriptions of these samples are summarized in the attached Bulk Sample Summary Sheet. FEI hand delivered the samples to Schneider Laboratories, Inc., located in Richmond, Virginia where they were analyzed for the presence of asbestos (48-hour sample analysis turn around time) using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM). A material is considered by the EPA and the Commonwealth of Virginia to be asbestos-containing if at least one (1) sample collected from a multi-sample group contains asbestos in an amount greater than one percent (>1%). Asbestos was detected in the following building materials sampled: Beige / Gray Floor Tile and Black Mastic Located under Carpet Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (2 nd Layer) located in the Reception Area White Vinyl Floor Tile (2 nd Layer) located in the Break Room

288 City of Richmond City Hall, Suite 110 Asbestos Bulk Sampling Survey Results Page 2 FEI Project Number: FEI-9AS331 11/06/2009 Please find attached the Bulk Sample Summary Sheet summarizing the samples collected and the location of these samples; Sampled Material Summary Charts summarizing the materials sampled and the locations of these materials; Laboratory Report; and Sample Location Field Sketch illustrating where the samples were collected. If you have any questions or comments concerning this report, please contact me at Respectfully submitted, FRANCE ENVIRONMENTAL, INC. Kevin M. Pittman Asbestos Inspector Michael E. Leonard Project Manager Attachments

289 BULK SAMPLE SUMMARY SHEET

290 MS Group Sample Num. Bulk Sample Summary Sheet For City of Richmond City Hall, Suite East Broad Street Richmond, Virginia Material Description Sample Location Analysis Result 01 1 Black Vinyl Cove Base with Brown Mastic Reception N.A.D Black Vinyl Cove Base with Brown Mastic Reception N.A.D White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic Reception (Top Layer) N.A.D White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic Reception (Top Layer) N.A.D Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Green Carpet Glue Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Green Carpet Glue Gray Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Yellow Carpet Glue Gray Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Yellow Carpet Glue Virginia Maddox s Office Virginia Maddox s Office Library Conference Room Library Conference Room GLUE=N.A.D. VFT=4% CHRY MSTC=4% CHRY GLUE=N.A.D. VFT=4% CHRY MSTC=4% CHRY GLUE=N.A.D. VFT=4% CHRY MSTC=2% CHRY GLUE=N.A.D. VFT=4% CHRY MSTC=2% CHRY VFT=5% CHRY MSTC=N.A.D. VFT=5% CHRY MSTC=N.A.D. VFT=5% CHRY MSTC=2% CHRY VFT=4% CHRY MSTC=2% CHRY 05 9 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic (MSTC) Reception (2 nd Layer) Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic (MSTC) Reception (2 nd Layer) Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic Dale Smith s Office Area (MSTC) (Under Carpet) Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic Dale Smith s Office Area (MSTC) (Under Carpet) White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic Break Room (Top Layer) N.A.D White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic Break Room (Top Layer) N.A.D White Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic Break Room (2 nd VFT=5% CHRY Layer) (MSTC) MSTC=N.A.D White Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic Break Room (2 nd VFT=5% CHRY Layer) (MSTC) MSTC=N.A.D. N.A.D. = No Asbestos Detected in Sample CHRY = Chrysotile Asbestos Note: FEI s scope of work was limited to the bulk sampling of building materials specific to this project as directed by the City of Richmond. A comprehensive building asbestos survey was not conducted.

291 SAMPLED MATERIAL SUMMARY CHART

292 SAMPLED MATERIAL SUMMARY CHART TESTED FOR: City of Richmond, General Services PROJECT: City Hall, Suite 110 Floor Tile Survey 900 East Broad Street 900 East Broad Street, Richmond, VA Suite G7 FEI PROJECT NO.: FEI-9AS331 Richmond, Virginia INSPECTOR(S): Kevin M. Pittman INSPECTION DATE: October 23, 2009 FINISHES All quantities are approximate (See Note Below) MS GROUP DESCRIPTION ASBESTOS YES/NO LOCATION TOTAL QUANTITY CATEGORY CONDITION 01 Black Vinyl Cove Base with Brown Mastic NO Reception 70 ln. ft. N/A N/A 02 White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic NO Reception (Top Layer) 250 ft 2 N/A N/A 03 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Green Carpet Glue YES (VFT & MSTC) Under Carpet Throughout (Excluding Reception & Break Room) 5,500 ft 2 Category I Fair 04 Gray Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) and Yellow Carpet Glue YES (VFT & MSTC) Included with MS 03 Above Included with MS 03 Category I Fair 05 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic 06 Beige Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Black Mastic (MSTC) YES (VFT Only) Reception (2 nd Layer) 250 ft 2 Category I Fair YES Raised Floor Area (Under Carpet) 1,500 ft 2 Category I Fair 07 White Vinyl Floor Tile with Yellow Mastic NO Break Room (Top Layer) 130 ft 2 N/A N/A 08 White Vinyl Floor Tile (VFT) with Yellow Mastic (MSTC) YES (VFT Only) Break Room (2 nd Layer) 130 ft 2 Category I Fair ft 2 = Square Feet ln. ft. = Linear Feet N/A = Not Applicable Note: MS Group 03 and 04 are expected to be the same tile covered with carpet. Note: FEI s scope of work was limited to the bulk sampling of building materials specific to this project as directed by the City of Richmond. A comprehensive building asbestos survey was not conducted. Therefore, the material locations and quantities listed above are only for the materials expected to be disturbed during the Project.

293 LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORTS

294 SCHNEIDER LABORATORIES I N C O R P O R A T E D 2512 W. Cary Street Richmond, Virginia LABS (5227) (FAX) Excellence in Service and Technology AIHA/ELLAP , NVLAP , NYELAP/NELAC 11413, CAELAP 2078, NC 593, SC LABORATORY ANALYSIS REPORT Asbestos Identification by EPA Method¹ 600/M4/82/020 ACCOUNT #: CLIENT: France Environmental, Inc. ADDRESS: 7834 Forest Hill Avenue Suite 7 Richmond, VA PROJECT NAME: CITY HALL SUITE 110 JOB LOCATION: BROAD ST RVA PROJECT NO.: 9A5331 PO NO.: Using SLI A6 DATE COLLECTED: 10/23/2009 DATE RECEIVED: 10/23/2009 DATE ANALYZED: 10/24/2009 DATE REPORTED: 10/26/2009 SampleType: BULK Client SLI Sample Sample No. Sample/ Layer ID Identification/ Layer Name BLK COVEBASE&BRWN MASTIC RECEP Asbestos Fibers PLM Analysis Results Other Materials Layer 1: Cove Base None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Rubbery Layer 2: Cove Base Mastic None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Brown, Brittle/Soft BLK COVEBASE&BRWN MASTIC RECEP Layer 1: Cove Base None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Rubbery Layer 2: Cove Base Mastic None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Brown, Brittle/Soft WHITE VFT W/ YLW GLU RECEPT Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft Total Number of Pages in Report: 4 Results relate only to samples as received by the laboratory. Visit for current certifications. Samples analyzed by the EPA Test Method are subject to the limitations of light microscopy including matrix interference. Gravimetric reduction and correlative analyses are recommended for all non-friable, organically bound materials. This method has a reporting limit of 1% or greater. Visual estimation contains an inherent range of uncertainty. This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the lab, and must not be used to claim NVLAP or other gov't agency endorsement.

295 Account - Workorder (Continued) Client SLI Sample Sample No. Sample/ Layer ID Identification/ Layer Name WHITE VFT W/ YLW GLU RECEPT Asbestos Fibers PLM Analysis Results Page 2 (Continued) Other Materials Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft BEIGE VFT W/ GRN GLU&BLK MAST Layer 1: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Green, Soft Layer 2: Vinyl Floor Tile 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 3: Mastic 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous BEIGE VFT W/ GRN GLU&BLK MAST Layer 1: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Green, Soft Layer 2: Vinyl Floor Tile 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 3: Mastic 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous GREY VFT W/ BRN SPECS W/ YLW G Layer 1: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft Layer 2: Vinyl Floor Tile 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Gray, Organically Bound Layer 3: Mastic 2% CHRYSOTILE 98% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous Total Number of Pages in Report: 4 Results relate only to samples as received by the laboratory. Visit for current certifications. Samples analyzed by the EPA Test Method are subject to the limitations of light microscopy including matrix interference. Gravimetric reduction and correlative analyses are recommended for all non-friable, organically bound materials. This method has a reporting limit of 1% or greater. Visual estimation contains an inherent range of uncertainty. This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the lab, and must not be used to claim NVLAP or other gov't agency endorsement.

296 Account - Workorder (Continued) Client SLI Sample Sample No. Sample/ Layer ID Identification/ Layer Name GREY VFT W/ BRN SPECS W/ YLW G Asbestos Fibers PLM Analysis Results Page 3 (Continued) Other Materials Layer 1: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft Layer 2: Vinyl Floor Tile 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Gray, Organically Bound Layer 3: Mastic 2% CHRYSOTILE 98% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous BEIGE VFT&YLW GLU 2ND LAYER RP Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 5% CHRYSOTILE 95% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft BEIGE VFT&YLW GLU 2ND LAYER RP Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 5% CHRYSOTILE 95% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft BEIGE VFT W/ BLK MASTI (D SMI) Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 5% CHRYSOTILE 95% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 2: Mastic 2% CHRYSOTILE 98% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous BEIGE VFT W/ BLK MASTI (D SMI) Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 4% CHRYSOTILE 96% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Beige, Organically Bound Layer 2: Mastic 2% CHRYSOTILE 98% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Black, Bituminous Total Number of Pages in Report: 4 Results relate only to samples as received by the laboratory. Visit for current certifications. Samples analyzed by the EPA Test Method are subject to the limitations of light microscopy including matrix interference. Gravimetric reduction and correlative analyses are recommended for all non-friable, organically bound materials. This method has a reporting limit of 1% or greater. Visual estimation contains an inherent range of uncertainty. This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the lab, and must not be used to claim NVLAP or other gov't agency endorsement.

297 Account - Workorder (Continued) Client SLI Sample Sample No. Sample/ Layer ID Identification/ Layer Name WHT VFTW/ YELLOW GLU TOPLAYER Asbestos Fibers PLM Analysis Results Page 4 (Continued) Other Materials Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft WHT VFTW/ YELLOW GLU TOPLAYER Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft WHT VFTW/ YELLOW GLU TOPLAYER2 Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 5% CHRYSOTILE 95% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft WHT VFTW/ YELLOW GLU TOPLAYER2 Layer 1: Vinyl Floor Tile 5% CHRYSOTILE 95% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL White, Organically Bound Layer 2: Glue None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL Yellow, Soft Analyst: SAMANI ABDELFADIEL Total Number of Pages in Report: 4 Results relate only to samples as received by the laboratory. Reviewed By: Hind Eldanaf, Asbestos Area Mgr Visit for current certifications. Samples analyzed by the EPA Test Method are subject to the limitations of light microscopy including matrix interference. Gravimetric reduction and correlative analyses are recommended for all non-friable, organically bound materials. This method has a reporting limit of 1% or greater. Visual estimation contains an inherent range of uncertainty. This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the lab, and must not be used to claim NVLAP or other gov't agency endorsement.

298 SAMPLE LOCATION FIELD SKETCH DRAWING

299 7, 8 11,12 5, 6 3, 4 1, 2 9, City Hall, Suite 110 Asbestos Sample Location Drawing

300 INSPECTOR S LICENSE

301